xref: /vim-8.2.3635/src/misc1.c (revision f4cd3e80)
1 /* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4:
2  *
3  * VIM - Vi IMproved	by Bram Moolenaar
4  *
5  * Do ":help uganda"  in Vim to read copying and usage conditions.
6  * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed.
7  * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code.
8  */
9 
10 /*
11  * misc1.c: functions that didn't seem to fit elsewhere
12  */
13 
14 #include "vim.h"
15 #include "version.h"
16 
17 #ifdef HAVE_FCNTL_H
18 # include <fcntl.h>		/* for chdir() */
19 #endif
20 
21 static char_u *vim_version_dir __ARGS((char_u *vimdir));
22 static char_u *remove_tail __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *name));
23 #if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X)
24 static char_u *remove_tail_with_ext __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *ext));
25 #endif
26 static int copy_indent __ARGS((int size, char_u	*src));
27 
28 /*
29  * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in the current line.
30  */
31     int
32 get_indent()
33 {
34     return get_indent_str(ml_get_curline(), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
35 }
36 
37 /*
38  * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum".
39  */
40     int
41 get_indent_lnum(lnum)
42     linenr_T	lnum;
43 {
44     return get_indent_str(ml_get(lnum), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
45 }
46 
47 #if defined(FEAT_FOLDING) || defined(PROTO)
48 /*
49  * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum" of buffer
50  * "buf".
51  */
52     int
53 get_indent_buf(buf, lnum)
54     buf_T	*buf;
55     linenr_T	lnum;
56 {
57     return get_indent_str(ml_get_buf(buf, lnum, FALSE), (int)buf->b_p_ts);
58 }
59 #endif
60 
61 /*
62  * count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "ptr", with
63  * 'tabstop' at "ts"
64  */
65     int
66 get_indent_str(ptr, ts)
67     char_u	*ptr;
68     int		ts;
69 {
70     int		count = 0;
71 
72     for ( ; *ptr; ++ptr)
73     {
74 	if (*ptr == TAB)    /* count a tab for what it is worth */
75 	    count += ts - (count % ts);
76 	else if (*ptr == ' ')
77 	    ++count;		/* count a space for one */
78 	else
79 	    break;
80     }
81     return count;
82 }
83 
84 /*
85  * Set the indent of the current line.
86  * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
87  * Caller must take care of undo.
88  * "flags":
89  *	SIN_CHANGED:	call changed_bytes() if the line was changed.
90  *	SIN_INSERT:	insert the indent in front of the line.
91  *	SIN_UNDO:	save line for undo before changing it.
92  * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
93  */
94     int
95 set_indent(size, flags)
96     int		size;
97     int		flags;
98 {
99     char_u	*p;
100     char_u	*newline;
101     char_u	*oldline;
102     char_u	*s;
103     int		todo;
104     int		ind_len;
105     int		line_len;
106     int		doit = FALSE;
107     int		ind_done;
108     int		tab_pad;
109     int		retval = FALSE;
110 
111     /*
112      * First check if there is anything to do and compute the number of
113      * characters needed for the indent.
114      */
115     todo = size;
116     ind_len = 0;
117     p = oldline = ml_get_curline();
118 
119     /* Calculate the buffer size for the new indent, and check to see if it
120      * isn't already set */
121 
122     /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
123     if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
124     {
125 	/* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
126 	 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
127 	if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
128 	{
129 	    ind_done = 0;
130 
131 	    /* count as many characters as we can use */
132 	    while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
133 	    {
134 		if (*p == TAB)
135 		{
136 		    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
137 					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
138 		    /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
139 		    if (todo < tab_pad)
140 			break;
141 		    todo -= tab_pad;
142 		    ++ind_len;
143 		    ind_done += tab_pad;
144 		}
145 		else
146 		{
147 		    --todo;
148 		    ++ind_len;
149 		    ++ind_done;
150 		}
151 		++p;
152 	    }
153 
154 	    /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
155 	    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
156 	    if (todo >= tab_pad)
157 	    {
158 		doit = TRUE;
159 		todo -= tab_pad;
160 		++ind_len;
161 		/* ind_done += tab_pad; */
162 	    }
163 	}
164 
165 	/* count tabs required for indent */
166 	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
167 	{
168 	    if (*p != TAB)
169 		doit = TRUE;
170 	    else
171 		++p;
172 	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
173 	    ++ind_len;
174 	    /* ind_done += (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; */
175 	}
176     }
177     /* count spaces required for indent */
178     while (todo > 0)
179     {
180 	if (*p != ' ')
181 	    doit = TRUE;
182 	else
183 	    ++p;
184 	--todo;
185 	++ind_len;
186 	/* ++ind_done; */
187     }
188 
189     /* Return if the indent is OK already. */
190     if (!doit && !vim_iswhite(*p) && !(flags & SIN_INSERT))
191 	return FALSE;
192 
193     /* Allocate memory for the new line. */
194     if (flags & SIN_INSERT)
195 	p = oldline;
196     else
197 	p = skipwhite(p);
198     line_len = (int)STRLEN(p) + 1;
199     newline = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
200     if (newline == NULL)
201 	return FALSE;
202 
203     /* Put the characters in the new line. */
204     s = newline;
205     todo = size;
206     /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
207     if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
208     {
209 	/* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
210 	 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
211 	if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
212 	{
213 	    p = oldline;
214 	    ind_done = 0;
215 
216 	    while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
217 	    {
218 		if (*p == TAB)
219 		{
220 		    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
221 					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
222 		    /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
223 		    if (todo < tab_pad)
224 			break;
225 		    todo -= tab_pad;
226 		    ind_done += tab_pad;
227 		}
228 		else
229 		{
230 		    --todo;
231 		    ++ind_done;
232 		}
233 		*s++ = *p++;
234 	    }
235 
236 	    /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
237 	    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
238 	    if (todo >= tab_pad)
239 	    {
240 		*s++ = TAB;
241 		todo -= tab_pad;
242 	    }
243 
244 	    p = skipwhite(p);
245 	}
246 
247 	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
248 	{
249 	    *s++ = TAB;
250 	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
251 	}
252     }
253     while (todo > 0)
254     {
255 	*s++ = ' ';
256 	--todo;
257     }
258     mch_memmove(s, p, (size_t)line_len);
259 
260     /* Replace the line (unless undo fails). */
261     if (!(flags & SIN_UNDO) || u_savesub(curwin->w_cursor.lnum) == OK)
262     {
263 	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, newline, FALSE);
264 	if (flags & SIN_CHANGED)
265 	    changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
266 	/* Correct saved cursor position if it's after the indent. */
267 	if (saved_cursor.lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum
268 				&& saved_cursor.col >= (colnr_T)(p - oldline))
269 	    saved_cursor.col += ind_len - (p - oldline);
270 	retval = TRUE;
271     }
272     else
273 	vim_free(newline);
274 
275     curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
276     return retval;
277 }
278 
279 /*
280  * Copy the indent from ptr to the current line (and fill to size)
281  * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
282  * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
283  */
284     static int
285 copy_indent(size, src)
286     int		size;
287     char_u	*src;
288 {
289     char_u	*p = NULL;
290     char_u	*line = NULL;
291     char_u	*s;
292     int		todo;
293     int		ind_len;
294     int		line_len = 0;
295     int		tab_pad;
296     int		ind_done;
297     int		round;
298 
299     /* Round 1: compute the number of characters needed for the indent
300      * Round 2: copy the characters. */
301     for (round = 1; round <= 2; ++round)
302     {
303 	todo = size;
304 	ind_len = 0;
305 	ind_done = 0;
306 	s = src;
307 
308 	/* Count/copy the usable portion of the source line */
309 	while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*s))
310 	{
311 	    if (*s == TAB)
312 	    {
313 		tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
314 					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
315 		/* Stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
316 		if (todo < tab_pad)
317 		    break;
318 		todo -= tab_pad;
319 		ind_done += tab_pad;
320 	    }
321 	    else
322 	    {
323 		--todo;
324 		++ind_done;
325 	    }
326 	    ++ind_len;
327 	    if (round == 2)
328 		*p++ = *s;
329 	    ++s;
330 	}
331 
332 	/* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
333 	tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
334 	if (todo >= tab_pad)
335 	{
336 	    todo -= tab_pad;
337 	    ++ind_len;
338 	    if (round == 2)
339 		*p++ = TAB;
340 	}
341 
342 	/* Add tabs required for indent */
343 	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
344 	{
345 	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
346 	    ++ind_len;
347 	    if (round == 2)
348 		*p++ = TAB;
349 	}
350 
351 	/* Count/add spaces required for indent */
352 	while (todo > 0)
353 	{
354 	    --todo;
355 	    ++ind_len;
356 	    if (round == 2)
357 		*p++ = ' ';
358 	}
359 
360 	if (round == 1)
361 	{
362 	    /* Allocate memory for the result: the copied indent, new indent
363 	     * and the rest of the line. */
364 	    line_len = (int)STRLEN(ml_get_curline()) + 1;
365 	    line = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
366 	    if (line == NULL)
367 		return FALSE;
368 	    p = line;
369 	}
370     }
371 
372     /* Append the original line */
373     mch_memmove(p, ml_get_curline(), (size_t)line_len);
374 
375     /* Replace the line */
376     ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, line, FALSE);
377 
378     /* Put the cursor after the indent. */
379     curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
380     return TRUE;
381 }
382 
383 /*
384  * Return the indent of the current line after a number.  Return -1 if no
385  * number was found.  Used for 'n' in 'formatoptions': numbered list.
386  * Since a pattern is used it can actually handle more than numbers.
387  */
388     int
389 get_number_indent(lnum)
390     linenr_T	lnum;
391 {
392     colnr_T	col;
393     pos_T	pos;
394     regmmatch_T	regmatch;
395 
396     if (lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
397 	return -1;
398     pos.lnum = 0;
399     regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(curbuf->b_p_flp, RE_MAGIC);
400     if (regmatch.regprog != NULL)
401     {
402 	regmatch.rmm_ic = FALSE;
403 	regmatch.rmm_maxcol = 0;
404 	if (vim_regexec_multi(&regmatch, curwin, curbuf, lnum, (colnr_T)0))
405 	{
406 	    pos.lnum = regmatch.endpos[0].lnum + lnum;
407 	    pos.col = regmatch.endpos[0].col;
408 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
409 	    pos.coladd = 0;
410 #endif
411 	}
412 	vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
413     }
414 
415     if (pos.lnum == 0 || *ml_get_pos(&pos) == NUL)
416 	return -1;
417     getvcol(curwin, &pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
418     return (int)col;
419 }
420 
421 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT)
422 
423 static int cin_is_cinword __ARGS((char_u *line));
424 
425 /*
426  * Return TRUE if the string "line" starts with a word from 'cinwords'.
427  */
428     static int
429 cin_is_cinword(line)
430     char_u	*line;
431 {
432     char_u	*cinw;
433     char_u	*cinw_buf;
434     int		cinw_len;
435     int		retval = FALSE;
436     int		len;
437 
438     cinw_len = (int)STRLEN(curbuf->b_p_cinw) + 1;
439     cinw_buf = alloc((unsigned)cinw_len);
440     if (cinw_buf != NULL)
441     {
442 	line = skipwhite(line);
443 	for (cinw = curbuf->b_p_cinw; *cinw; )
444 	{
445 	    len = copy_option_part(&cinw, cinw_buf, cinw_len, ",");
446 	    if (STRNCMP(line, cinw_buf, len) == 0
447 		    && (!vim_iswordc(line[len]) || !vim_iswordc(line[len - 1])))
448 	    {
449 		retval = TRUE;
450 		break;
451 	    }
452 	}
453 	vim_free(cinw_buf);
454     }
455     return retval;
456 }
457 #endif
458 
459 /*
460  * open_line: Add a new line below or above the current line.
461  *
462  * For VREPLACE mode, we only add a new line when we get to the end of the
463  * file, otherwise we just start replacing the next line.
464  *
465  * Caller must take care of undo.  Since VREPLACE may affect any number of
466  * lines however, it may call u_save_cursor() again when starting to change a
467  * new line.
468  * "flags": OPENLINE_DELSPACES	delete spaces after cursor
469  *	    OPENLINE_DO_COM	format comments
470  *	    OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL	keep trailing spaces
471  *	    OPENLINE_MARKFIX	adjust mark positions after the line break
472  *
473  * Return TRUE for success, FALSE for failure
474  */
475     int
476 open_line(dir, flags, old_indent)
477     int		dir;		/* FORWARD or BACKWARD */
478     int		flags;
479     int		old_indent;	/* indent for after ^^D in Insert mode */
480 {
481     char_u	*saved_line;		/* copy of the original line */
482     char_u	*next_line = NULL;	/* copy of the next line */
483     char_u	*p_extra = NULL;	/* what goes to next line */
484     int		less_cols = 0;		/* less columns for mark in new line */
485     int		less_cols_off = 0;	/* columns to skip for mark adjust */
486     pos_T	old_cursor;		/* old cursor position */
487     int		newcol = 0;		/* new cursor column */
488     int		newindent = 0;		/* auto-indent of the new line */
489     int		n;
490     int		trunc_line = FALSE;	/* truncate current line afterwards */
491     int		retval = FALSE;		/* return value, default is FAIL */
492 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
493     int		extra_len = 0;		/* length of p_extra string */
494     int		lead_len;		/* length of comment leader */
495     char_u	*lead_flags;	/* position in 'comments' for comment leader */
496     char_u	*leader = NULL;		/* copy of comment leader */
497 #endif
498     char_u	*allocated = NULL;	/* allocated memory */
499 #if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_LISP) \
500 	|| defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
501     char_u	*p;
502 #endif
503     int		saved_char = NUL;	/* init for GCC */
504 #if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
505     pos_T	*pos;
506 #endif
507 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
508     int		do_si = (!p_paste && curbuf->b_p_si
509 # ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
510 					&& !curbuf->b_p_cin
511 # endif
512 			);
513     int		no_si = FALSE;		/* reset did_si afterwards */
514     int		first_char = NUL;	/* init for GCC */
515 #endif
516 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
517     int		vreplace_mode;
518 #endif
519     int		did_append;		/* appended a new line */
520     int		saved_pi = curbuf->b_p_pi; /* copy of preserveindent setting */
521 
522     /*
523      * make a copy of the current line so we can mess with it
524      */
525     saved_line = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
526     if (saved_line == NULL)	    /* out of memory! */
527 	return FALSE;
528 
529 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
530     if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
531     {
532 	/*
533 	 * With VREPLACE we make a copy of the next line, which we will be
534 	 * starting to replace.  First make the new line empty and let vim play
535 	 * with the indenting and comment leader to its heart's content.  Then
536 	 * we grab what it ended up putting on the new line, put back the
537 	 * original line, and call ins_char() to put each new character onto
538 	 * the line, replacing what was there before and pushing the right
539 	 * stuff onto the replace stack.  -- webb.
540 	 */
541 	if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum < orig_line_count)
542 	    next_line = vim_strsave(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1));
543 	else
544 	    next_line = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
545 	if (next_line == NULL)	    /* out of memory! */
546 	    goto theend;
547 
548 	/*
549 	 * In VREPLACE mode, a NL replaces the rest of the line, and starts
550 	 * replacing the next line, so push all of the characters left on the
551 	 * line onto the replace stack.  We'll push any other characters that
552 	 * might be replaced at the start of the next line (due to autoindent
553 	 * etc) a bit later.
554 	 */
555 	replace_push(NUL);  /* Call twice because BS over NL expects it */
556 	replace_push(NUL);
557 	p = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
558 	while (*p != NUL)
559 	    replace_push(*p++);
560 	saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
561     }
562 #endif
563 
564     if ((State & INSERT)
565 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
566 	    && !(State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
567 #endif
568 	    )
569     {
570 	p_extra = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
571 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
572 	if (do_si)		/* need first char after new line break */
573 	{
574 	    p = skipwhite(p_extra);
575 	    first_char = *p;
576 	}
577 #endif
578 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
579 	extra_len = (int)STRLEN(p_extra);
580 #endif
581 	saved_char = *p_extra;
582 	*p_extra = NUL;
583     }
584 
585     u_clearline();		/* cannot do "U" command when adding lines */
586 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
587     did_si = FALSE;
588 #endif
589     ai_col = 0;
590 
591     /*
592      * If we just did an auto-indent, then we didn't type anything on
593      * the prior line, and it should be truncated.  Do this even if 'ai' is not
594      * set because automatically inserting a comment leader also sets did_ai.
595      */
596     if (dir == FORWARD && did_ai)
597 	trunc_line = TRUE;
598 
599     /*
600      * If 'autoindent' and/or 'smartindent' is set, try to figure out what
601      * indent to use for the new line.
602      */
603     if (curbuf->b_p_ai
604 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
605 			|| do_si
606 #endif
607 					    )
608     {
609 	/*
610 	 * count white space on current line
611 	 */
612 	newindent = get_indent_str(saved_line, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
613 	if (newindent == 0)
614 	    newindent = old_indent;	/* for ^^D command in insert mode */
615 
616 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
617 	/*
618 	 * Do smart indenting.
619 	 * In insert/replace mode (only when dir == FORWARD)
620 	 * we may move some text to the next line. If it starts with '{'
621 	 * don't add an indent. Fixes inserting a NL before '{' in line
622 	 *	"if (condition) {"
623 	 */
624 	if (!trunc_line && do_si && *saved_line != NUL
625 				    && (p_extra == NULL || first_char != '{'))
626 	{
627 	    char_u  *ptr;
628 	    char_u  last_char;
629 
630 	    old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
631 	    ptr = saved_line;
632 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
633 	    if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
634 		lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
635 	    else
636 		lead_len = 0;
637 # endif
638 	    if (dir == FORWARD)
639 	    {
640 		/*
641 		 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
642 		 * recognised as comments.
643 		 */
644 		if (
645 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
646 			lead_len == 0 &&
647 # endif
648 			ptr[0] == '#')
649 		{
650 		    while (ptr[0] == '#' && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
651 			ptr = ml_get(--curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
652 		    newindent = get_indent();
653 		}
654 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
655 		if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
656 		    lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
657 		else
658 		    lead_len = 0;
659 		if (lead_len > 0)
660 		{
661 		    /*
662 		     * This case gets the following right:
663 		     *	    \*
664 		     *	     * A comment (read '\' as '/').
665 		     *	     *\
666 		     * #define IN_THE_WAY
667 		     *	    This should line up here;
668 		     */
669 		    p = skipwhite(ptr);
670 		    if (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '*')
671 			p++;
672 		    if (p[0] == '*')
673 		    {
674 			for (p++; *p; p++)
675 			{
676 			    if (p[0] == '/' && p[-1] == '*')
677 			    {
678 				/*
679 				 * End of C comment, indent should line up
680 				 * with the line containing the start of
681 				 * the comment
682 				 */
683 				curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
684 				if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
685 				{
686 				    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
687 				    newindent = get_indent();
688 				}
689 			    }
690 			}
691 		    }
692 		}
693 		else	/* Not a comment line */
694 # endif
695 		{
696 		    /* Find last non-blank in line */
697 		    p = ptr + STRLEN(ptr) - 1;
698 		    while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
699 			--p;
700 		    last_char = *p;
701 
702 		    /*
703 		     * find the character just before the '{' or ';'
704 		     */
705 		    if (last_char == '{' || last_char == ';')
706 		    {
707 			if (p > ptr)
708 			    --p;
709 			while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
710 			    --p;
711 		    }
712 		    /*
713 		     * Try to catch lines that are split over multiple
714 		     * lines.  eg:
715 		     *	    if (condition &&
716 		     *			condition) {
717 		     *		Should line up here!
718 		     *	    }
719 		     */
720 		    if (*p == ')')
721 		    {
722 			curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
723 			if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) != NULL)
724 			{
725 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
726 			    newindent = get_indent();
727 			    ptr = ml_get_curline();
728 			}
729 		    }
730 		    /*
731 		     * If last character is '{' do indent, without
732 		     * checking for "if" and the like.
733 		     */
734 		    if (last_char == '{')
735 		    {
736 			did_si = TRUE;	/* do indent */
737 			no_si = TRUE;	/* don't delete it when '{' typed */
738 		    }
739 		    /*
740 		     * Look for "if" and the like, use 'cinwords'.
741 		     * Don't do this if the previous line ended in ';' or
742 		     * '}'.
743 		     */
744 		    else if (last_char != ';' && last_char != '}'
745 						       && cin_is_cinword(ptr))
746 			did_si = TRUE;
747 		}
748 	    }
749 	    else /* dir == BACKWARD */
750 	    {
751 		/*
752 		 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
753 		 * recognised as comments.
754 		 */
755 		if (
756 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
757 			lead_len == 0 &&
758 # endif
759 			ptr[0] == '#')
760 		{
761 		    int was_backslashed = FALSE;
762 
763 		    while ((ptr[0] == '#' || was_backslashed) &&
764 			 curwin->w_cursor.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
765 		    {
766 			if (*ptr && ptr[STRLEN(ptr) - 1] == '\\')
767 			    was_backslashed = TRUE;
768 			else
769 			    was_backslashed = FALSE;
770 			ptr = ml_get(++curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
771 		    }
772 		    if (was_backslashed)
773 			newindent = 0;	    /* Got to end of file */
774 		    else
775 			newindent = get_indent();
776 		}
777 		p = skipwhite(ptr);
778 		if (*p == '}')	    /* if line starts with '}': do indent */
779 		    did_si = TRUE;
780 		else		    /* can delete indent when '{' typed */
781 		    can_si_back = TRUE;
782 	    }
783 	    curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
784 	}
785 	if (do_si)
786 	    can_si = TRUE;
787 #endif /* FEAT_SMARTINDENT */
788 
789 	did_ai = TRUE;
790     }
791 
792 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
793     /*
794      * Find out if the current line starts with a comment leader.
795      * This may then be inserted in front of the new line.
796      */
797     end_comment_pending = NUL;
798     if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
799 	lead_len = get_leader_len(saved_line, &lead_flags, dir == BACKWARD);
800     else
801 	lead_len = 0;
802     if (lead_len > 0)
803     {
804 	char_u	*lead_repl = NULL;	    /* replaces comment leader */
805 	int	lead_repl_len = 0;	    /* length of *lead_repl */
806 	char_u	lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN];   /* middle-comment string */
807 	char_u	lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN];	    /* end-comment string */
808 	char_u	*comment_end = NULL;	    /* where lead_end has been found */
809 	int	extra_space = FALSE;	    /* append extra space */
810 	int	current_flag;
811 	int	require_blank = FALSE;	    /* requires blank after middle */
812 	char_u	*p2;
813 
814 	/*
815 	 * If the comment leader has the start, middle or end flag, it may not
816 	 * be used or may be replaced with the middle leader.
817 	 */
818 	for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
819 	{
820 	    if (*p == COM_BLANK)
821 	    {
822 		require_blank = TRUE;
823 		continue;
824 	    }
825 	    if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
826 	    {
827 		current_flag = *p;
828 		if (*p == COM_START)
829 		{
830 		    /*
831 		     * Doing "O" on a start of comment does not insert leader.
832 		     */
833 		    if (dir == BACKWARD)
834 		    {
835 			lead_len = 0;
836 			break;
837 		    }
838 
839 		    /* find start of middle part */
840 		    (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
841 		    require_blank = FALSE;
842 		}
843 
844 		/*
845 		 * Isolate the strings of the middle and end leader.
846 		 */
847 		while (*p && p[-1] != ':')	/* find end of middle flags */
848 		{
849 		    if (*p == COM_BLANK)
850 			require_blank = TRUE;
851 		    ++p;
852 		}
853 		(void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
854 
855 		while (*p && p[-1] != ':')	/* find end of end flags */
856 		{
857 		    /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
858 		    if (*p == COM_AUTO_END)
859 			end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
860 		    ++p;
861 		}
862 		n = copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
863 
864 		if (end_comment_pending == -1)	/* we can set it now */
865 		    end_comment_pending = lead_end[n - 1];
866 
867 		/*
868 		 * If the end of the comment is in the same line, don't use
869 		 * the comment leader.
870 		 */
871 		if (dir == FORWARD)
872 		{
873 		    for (p = saved_line + lead_len; *p; ++p)
874 			if (STRNCMP(p, lead_end, n) == 0)
875 			{
876 			    comment_end = p;
877 			    lead_len = 0;
878 			    break;
879 			}
880 		}
881 
882 		/*
883 		 * Doing "o" on a start of comment inserts the middle leader.
884 		 */
885 		if (lead_len > 0)
886 		{
887 		    if (current_flag == COM_START)
888 		    {
889 			lead_repl = lead_middle;
890 			lead_repl_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
891 		    }
892 
893 		    /*
894 		     * If we have hit RETURN immediately after the start
895 		     * comment leader, then put a space after the middle
896 		     * comment leader on the next line.
897 		     */
898 		    if (!vim_iswhite(saved_line[lead_len - 1])
899 			    && ((p_extra != NULL
900 				    && (int)curwin->w_cursor.col == lead_len)
901 				|| (p_extra == NULL
902 				    && saved_line[lead_len] == NUL)
903 				|| require_blank))
904 			extra_space = TRUE;
905 		}
906 		break;
907 	    }
908 	    if (*p == COM_END)
909 	    {
910 		/*
911 		 * Doing "o" on the end of a comment does not insert leader.
912 		 * Remember where the end is, might want to use it to find the
913 		 * start (for C-comments).
914 		 */
915 		if (dir == FORWARD)
916 		{
917 		    comment_end = skipwhite(saved_line);
918 		    lead_len = 0;
919 		    break;
920 		}
921 
922 		/*
923 		 * Doing "O" on the end of a comment inserts the middle leader.
924 		 * Find the string for the middle leader, searching backwards.
925 		 */
926 		while (p > curbuf->b_p_com && *p != ',')
927 		    --p;
928 		for (lead_repl = p; lead_repl > curbuf->b_p_com
929 					 && lead_repl[-1] != ':'; --lead_repl)
930 		    ;
931 		lead_repl_len = (int)(p - lead_repl);
932 
933 		/* We can probably always add an extra space when doing "O" on
934 		 * the comment-end */
935 		extra_space = TRUE;
936 
937 		/* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
938 		for (p2 = p; *p2 && *p2 != ':'; p2++)
939 		{
940 		    if (*p2 == COM_AUTO_END)
941 			end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
942 		}
943 		if (end_comment_pending == -1)
944 		{
945 		    /* Find last character in end-comment string */
946 		    while (*p2 && *p2 != ',')
947 			p2++;
948 		    end_comment_pending = p2[-1];
949 		}
950 		break;
951 	    }
952 	    if (*p == COM_FIRST)
953 	    {
954 		/*
955 		 * Comment leader for first line only:	Don't repeat leader
956 		 * when using "O", blank out leader when using "o".
957 		 */
958 		if (dir == BACKWARD)
959 		    lead_len = 0;
960 		else
961 		{
962 		    lead_repl = (char_u *)"";
963 		    lead_repl_len = 0;
964 		}
965 		break;
966 	    }
967 	}
968 	if (lead_len)
969 	{
970 	    /* allocate buffer (may concatenate p_exta later) */
971 	    leader = alloc(lead_len + lead_repl_len + extra_space +
972 							      extra_len + 1);
973 	    allocated = leader;		    /* remember to free it later */
974 
975 	    if (leader == NULL)
976 		lead_len = 0;
977 	    else
978 	    {
979 		vim_strncpy(leader, saved_line, lead_len);
980 
981 		/*
982 		 * Replace leader with lead_repl, right or left adjusted
983 		 */
984 		if (lead_repl != NULL)
985 		{
986 		    int		c = 0;
987 		    int		off = 0;
988 
989 		    for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
990 		    {
991 			if (*p == COM_RIGHT || *p == COM_LEFT)
992 			    c = *p;
993 			else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
994 			    off = getdigits(&p);
995 		    }
996 		    if (c == COM_RIGHT)    /* right adjusted leader */
997 		    {
998 			/* find last non-white in the leader to line up with */
999 			for (p = leader + lead_len - 1; p > leader
1000 						      && vim_iswhite(*p); --p)
1001 			    ;
1002 			++p;
1003 
1004 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1005 			/* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1006 			 * screen characters, not bytes. */
1007 			{
1008 			    int	    repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1009 							       lead_repl_len);
1010 			    int	    old_size = 0;
1011 			    char_u  *endp = p;
1012 			    int	    l;
1013 
1014 			    while (old_size < repl_size && p > leader)
1015 			    {
1016 				mb_ptr_back(leader, p);
1017 				old_size += ptr2cells(p);
1018 			    }
1019 			    l = lead_repl_len - (endp - p);
1020 			    if (l != 0)
1021 				mch_memmove(endp + l, endp,
1022 					(size_t)((leader + lead_len) - endp));
1023 			    lead_len += l;
1024 			}
1025 #else
1026 			if (p < leader + lead_repl_len)
1027 			    p = leader;
1028 			else
1029 			    p -= lead_repl_len;
1030 #endif
1031 			mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1032 			if (p + lead_repl_len > leader + lead_len)
1033 			    p[lead_repl_len] = NUL;
1034 
1035 			/* blank-out any other chars from the old leader. */
1036 			while (--p >= leader)
1037 			{
1038 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1039 			    int l = mb_head_off(leader, p);
1040 
1041 			    if (l > 1)
1042 			    {
1043 				p -= l;
1044 				if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1045 				{
1046 				    p[1] = ' ';
1047 				    --l;
1048 				}
1049 				mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l + 1,
1050 				   (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - (p + l + 1)));
1051 				lead_len -= l;
1052 				*p = ' ';
1053 			    }
1054 			    else
1055 #endif
1056 			    if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1057 				*p = ' ';
1058 			}
1059 		    }
1060 		    else		    /* left adjusted leader */
1061 		    {
1062 			p = skipwhite(leader);
1063 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1064 			/* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1065 			 * screen characters, not bytes. Move the part that is
1066 			 * not to be overwritten. */
1067 			{
1068 			    int	    repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1069 							       lead_repl_len);
1070 			    int	    i;
1071 			    int	    l;
1072 
1073 			    for (i = 0; p[i] != NUL && i < lead_len; i += l)
1074 			    {
1075 				l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i);
1076 				if (vim_strnsize(p, i + l) > repl_size)
1077 				    break;
1078 			    }
1079 			    if (i != lead_repl_len)
1080 			    {
1081 				mch_memmove(p + lead_repl_len, p + i,
1082 				       (size_t)(lead_len - i - (leader - p)));
1083 				lead_len += lead_repl_len - i;
1084 			    }
1085 			}
1086 #endif
1087 			mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1088 
1089 			/* Replace any remaining non-white chars in the old
1090 			 * leader by spaces.  Keep Tabs, the indent must
1091 			 * remain the same. */
1092 			for (p += lead_repl_len; p < leader + lead_len; ++p)
1093 			    if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1094 			    {
1095 				/* Don't put a space before a TAB. */
1096 				if (p + 1 < leader + lead_len && p[1] == TAB)
1097 				{
1098 				    --lead_len;
1099 				    mch_memmove(p, p + 1,
1100 						     (leader + lead_len) - p);
1101 				}
1102 				else
1103 				{
1104 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1105 				    int	    l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p);
1106 
1107 				    if (l > 1)
1108 				    {
1109 					if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1110 					{
1111 					    /* Replace a double-wide char with
1112 					     * two spaces */
1113 					    --l;
1114 					    *p++ = ' ';
1115 					}
1116 					mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l,
1117 						     (leader + lead_len) - p);
1118 					lead_len -= l - 1;
1119 				    }
1120 #endif
1121 				    *p = ' ';
1122 				}
1123 			    }
1124 			*p = NUL;
1125 		    }
1126 
1127 		    /* Recompute the indent, it may have changed. */
1128 		    if (curbuf->b_p_ai
1129 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1130 					|| do_si
1131 #endif
1132 							   )
1133 			newindent = get_indent_str(leader, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
1134 
1135 		    /* Add the indent offset */
1136 		    if (newindent + off < 0)
1137 		    {
1138 			off = -newindent;
1139 			newindent = 0;
1140 		    }
1141 		    else
1142 			newindent += off;
1143 
1144 		    /* Correct trailing spaces for the shift, so that
1145 		     * alignment remains equal. */
1146 		    while (off > 0 && lead_len > 0
1147 					       && leader[lead_len - 1] == ' ')
1148 		    {
1149 			/* Don't do it when there is a tab before the space */
1150 			if (vim_strchr(skipwhite(leader), '\t') != NULL)
1151 			    break;
1152 			--lead_len;
1153 			--off;
1154 		    }
1155 
1156 		    /* If the leader ends in white space, don't add an
1157 		     * extra space */
1158 		    if (lead_len > 0 && vim_iswhite(leader[lead_len - 1]))
1159 			extra_space = FALSE;
1160 		    leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1161 		}
1162 
1163 		if (extra_space)
1164 		{
1165 		    leader[lead_len++] = ' ';
1166 		    leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1167 		}
1168 
1169 		newcol = lead_len;
1170 
1171 		/*
1172 		 * if a new indent will be set below, remove the indent that
1173 		 * is in the comment leader
1174 		 */
1175 		if (newindent
1176 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1177 				|| did_si
1178 #endif
1179 					   )
1180 		{
1181 		    while (lead_len && vim_iswhite(*leader))
1182 		    {
1183 			--lead_len;
1184 			--newcol;
1185 			++leader;
1186 		    }
1187 		}
1188 
1189 	    }
1190 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1191 	    did_si = can_si = FALSE;
1192 #endif
1193 	}
1194 	else if (comment_end != NULL)
1195 	{
1196 	    /*
1197 	     * We have finished a comment, so we don't use the leader.
1198 	     * If this was a C-comment and 'ai' or 'si' is set do a normal
1199 	     * indent to align with the line containing the start of the
1200 	     * comment.
1201 	     */
1202 	    if (comment_end[0] == '*' && comment_end[1] == '/' &&
1203 			(curbuf->b_p_ai
1204 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1205 					|| do_si
1206 #endif
1207 							   ))
1208 	    {
1209 		old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1210 		curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(comment_end - saved_line);
1211 		if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
1212 		{
1213 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
1214 		    newindent = get_indent();
1215 		}
1216 		curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1217 	    }
1218 	}
1219     }
1220 #endif
1221 
1222     /* (State == INSERT || State == REPLACE), only when dir == FORWARD */
1223     if (p_extra != NULL)
1224     {
1225 	*p_extra = saved_char;		/* restore char that NUL replaced */
1226 
1227 	/*
1228 	 * When 'ai' set or "flags" has OPENLINE_DELSPACES, skip to the first
1229 	 * non-blank.
1230 	 *
1231 	 * When in REPLACE mode, put the deleted blanks on the replace stack,
1232 	 * preceded by a NUL, so they can be put back when a BS is entered.
1233 	 */
1234 	if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1235 	    replace_push(NUL);	    /* end of extra blanks */
1236 	if (curbuf->b_p_ai || (flags & OPENLINE_DELSPACES))
1237 	{
1238 	    while ((*p_extra == ' ' || *p_extra == '\t')
1239 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1240 		    && (!enc_utf8
1241 			       || !utf_iscomposing(utf_ptr2char(p_extra + 1)))
1242 #endif
1243 		    )
1244 	    {
1245 		if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1246 		    replace_push(*p_extra);
1247 		++p_extra;
1248 		++less_cols_off;
1249 	    }
1250 	}
1251 	if (*p_extra != NUL)
1252 	    did_ai = FALSE;	    /* append some text, don't truncate now */
1253 
1254 	/* columns for marks adjusted for removed columns */
1255 	less_cols = (int)(p_extra - saved_line);
1256     }
1257 
1258     if (p_extra == NULL)
1259 	p_extra = (char_u *)"";		    /* append empty line */
1260 
1261 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1262     /* concatenate leader and p_extra, if there is a leader */
1263     if (lead_len)
1264     {
1265 	STRCAT(leader, p_extra);
1266 	p_extra = leader;
1267 	did_ai = TRUE;	    /* So truncating blanks works with comments */
1268 	less_cols -= lead_len;
1269     }
1270     else
1271 	end_comment_pending = NUL;  /* turns out there was no leader */
1272 #endif
1273 
1274     old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1275     if (dir == BACKWARD)
1276 	--curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1277 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1278     if (!(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) || old_cursor.lnum >= orig_line_count)
1279 #endif
1280     {
1281 	if (ml_append(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, (colnr_T)0, FALSE)
1282 								      == FAIL)
1283 	    goto theend;
1284 	/* Postpone calling changed_lines(), because it would mess up folding
1285 	 * with markers. */
1286 	mark_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, 1L, 0L);
1287 	did_append = TRUE;
1288     }
1289 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1290     else
1291     {
1292 	/*
1293 	 * In VREPLACE mode we are starting to replace the next line.
1294 	 */
1295 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum++;
1296 	if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= Insstart.lnum + vr_lines_changed)
1297 	{
1298 	    /* In case we NL to a new line, BS to the previous one, and NL
1299 	     * again, we don't want to save the new line for undo twice.
1300 	     */
1301 	    (void)u_save_cursor();		    /* errors are ignored! */
1302 	    vr_lines_changed++;
1303 	}
1304 	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, TRUE);
1305 	changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
1306 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
1307 	did_append = FALSE;
1308     }
1309 #endif
1310 
1311     if (newindent
1312 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1313 		    || did_si
1314 #endif
1315 				)
1316     {
1317 	++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1318 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1319 	if (did_si)
1320 	{
1321 	    if (p_sr)
1322 		newindent -= newindent % (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1323 	    newindent += (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1324 	}
1325 #endif
1326 	/* Copy the indent only if expand tab is disabled */
1327 	if (curbuf->b_p_ci && !curbuf->b_p_et)
1328 	{
1329 	    (void)copy_indent(newindent, saved_line);
1330 
1331 	    /*
1332 	     * Set the 'preserveindent' option so that any further screwing
1333 	     * with the line doesn't entirely destroy our efforts to preserve
1334 	     * it.  It gets restored at the function end.
1335 	     */
1336 	    curbuf->b_p_pi = TRUE;
1337 	}
1338 	else
1339 	    (void)set_indent(newindent, SIN_INSERT);
1340 	less_cols -= curwin->w_cursor.col;
1341 
1342 	ai_col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1343 
1344 	/*
1345 	 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the new indent, there must
1346 	 * be a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS
1347 	 */
1348 	if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1349 	    for (n = 0; n < (int)curwin->w_cursor.col; ++n)
1350 		replace_push(NUL);
1351 	newcol += curwin->w_cursor.col;
1352 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1353 	if (no_si)
1354 	    did_si = FALSE;
1355 #endif
1356     }
1357 
1358 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1359     /*
1360      * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the extra leader, there must be
1361      * a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS.
1362      */
1363     if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1364 	while (lead_len-- > 0)
1365 	    replace_push(NUL);
1366 #endif
1367 
1368     curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1369 
1370     if (dir == FORWARD)
1371     {
1372 	if (trunc_line || (State & INSERT))
1373 	{
1374 	    /* truncate current line at cursor */
1375 	    saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
1376 	    /* Remove trailing white space, unless OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL used. */
1377 	    if (trunc_line && !(flags & OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL))
1378 		truncate_spaces(saved_line);
1379 	    ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, saved_line, FALSE);
1380 	    saved_line = NULL;
1381 	    if (did_append)
1382 	    {
1383 		changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col,
1384 					       curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, 1L);
1385 		did_append = FALSE;
1386 
1387 		/* Move marks after the line break to the new line. */
1388 		if (flags & OPENLINE_MARKFIX)
1389 		    mark_col_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
1390 					 curwin->w_cursor.col + less_cols_off,
1391 							1L, (long)-less_cols);
1392 	    }
1393 	    else
1394 		changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
1395 	}
1396 
1397 	/*
1398 	 * Put the cursor on the new line.  Careful: the scrollup() above may
1399 	 * have moved w_cursor, we must use old_cursor.
1400 	 */
1401 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum = old_cursor.lnum + 1;
1402     }
1403     if (did_append)
1404 	changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1L);
1405 
1406     curwin->w_cursor.col = newcol;
1407 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1408     curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1409 #endif
1410 
1411 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1412     /*
1413      * In VREPLACE mode, we are handling the replace stack ourselves, so stop
1414      * fixthisline() from doing it (via change_indent()) by telling it we're in
1415      * normal INSERT mode.
1416      */
1417     if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1418     {
1419 	vreplace_mode = State;	/* So we know to put things right later */
1420 	State = INSERT;
1421     }
1422     else
1423 	vreplace_mode = 0;
1424 #endif
1425 #ifdef FEAT_LISP
1426     /*
1427      * May do lisp indenting.
1428      */
1429     if (!p_paste
1430 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1431 	    && leader == NULL
1432 # endif
1433 	    && curbuf->b_p_lisp
1434 	    && curbuf->b_p_ai)
1435     {
1436 	fixthisline(get_lisp_indent);
1437 	p = ml_get_curline();
1438 	ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1439     }
1440 #endif
1441 #ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
1442     /*
1443      * May do indenting after opening a new line.
1444      */
1445     if (!p_paste
1446 	    && (curbuf->b_p_cin
1447 #  ifdef FEAT_EVAL
1448 		    || *curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL
1449 #  endif
1450 		)
1451 	    && in_cinkeys(dir == FORWARD
1452 		? KEY_OPEN_FORW
1453 		: KEY_OPEN_BACK, ' ', linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum)))
1454     {
1455 	do_c_expr_indent();
1456 	p = ml_get_curline();
1457 	ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1458     }
1459 #endif
1460 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1461     if (vreplace_mode != 0)
1462 	State = vreplace_mode;
1463 #endif
1464 
1465 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1466     /*
1467      * Finally, VREPLACE gets the stuff on the new line, then puts back the
1468      * original line, and inserts the new stuff char by char, pushing old stuff
1469      * onto the replace stack (via ins_char()).
1470      */
1471     if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1472     {
1473 	/* Put new line in p_extra */
1474 	p_extra = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
1475 	if (p_extra == NULL)
1476 	    goto theend;
1477 
1478 	/* Put back original line */
1479 	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, next_line, FALSE);
1480 
1481 	/* Insert new stuff into line again */
1482 	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
1483 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1484 	curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1485 #endif
1486 	ins_bytes(p_extra);	/* will call changed_bytes() */
1487 	vim_free(p_extra);
1488 	next_line = NULL;
1489     }
1490 #endif
1491 
1492     retval = TRUE;		/* success! */
1493 theend:
1494     curbuf->b_p_pi = saved_pi;
1495     vim_free(saved_line);
1496     vim_free(next_line);
1497     vim_free(allocated);
1498     return retval;
1499 }
1500 
1501 #if defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(PROTO)
1502 /*
1503  * get_leader_len() returns the length of the prefix of the given string
1504  * which introduces a comment.	If this string is not a comment then 0 is
1505  * returned.
1506  * When "flags" is not NULL, it is set to point to the flags of the recognized
1507  * comment leader.
1508  * "backward" must be true for the "O" command.
1509  */
1510     int
1511 get_leader_len(line, flags, backward)
1512     char_u	*line;
1513     char_u	**flags;
1514     int		backward;
1515 {
1516     int		i, j;
1517     int		got_com = FALSE;
1518     int		found_one;
1519     char_u	part_buf[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* buffer for one option part */
1520     char_u	*string;		/* pointer to comment string */
1521     char_u	*list;
1522 
1523     i = 0;
1524     while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))    /* leading white space is ignored */
1525 	++i;
1526 
1527     /*
1528      * Repeat to match several nested comment strings.
1529      */
1530     while (line[i])
1531     {
1532 	/*
1533 	 * scan through the 'comments' option for a match
1534 	 */
1535 	found_one = FALSE;
1536 	for (list = curbuf->b_p_com; *list; )
1537 	{
1538 	    /*
1539 	     * Get one option part into part_buf[].  Advance list to next one.
1540 	     * put string at start of string.
1541 	     */
1542 	    if (!got_com && flags != NULL)  /* remember where flags started */
1543 		*flags = list;
1544 	    (void)copy_option_part(&list, part_buf, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
1545 	    string = vim_strchr(part_buf, ':');
1546 	    if (string == NULL)	    /* missing ':', ignore this part */
1547 		continue;
1548 	    *string++ = NUL;	    /* isolate flags from string */
1549 
1550 	    /*
1551 	     * When already found a nested comment, only accept further
1552 	     * nested comments.
1553 	     */
1554 	    if (got_com && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1555 		continue;
1556 
1557 	    /* When 'O' flag used don't use for "O" command */
1558 	    if (backward && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NOBACK) != NULL)
1559 		continue;
1560 
1561 	    /*
1562 	     * Line contents and string must match.
1563 	     * When string starts with white space, must have some white space
1564 	     * (but the amount does not need to match, there might be a mix of
1565 	     * TABs and spaces).
1566 	     */
1567 	    if (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1568 	    {
1569 		if (i == 0 || !vim_iswhite(line[i - 1]))
1570 		    continue;
1571 		while (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1572 		    ++string;
1573 	    }
1574 	    for (j = 0; string[j] != NUL && string[j] == line[i + j]; ++j)
1575 		;
1576 	    if (string[j] != NUL)
1577 		continue;
1578 
1579 	    /*
1580 	     * When 'b' flag used, there must be white space or an
1581 	     * end-of-line after the string in the line.
1582 	     */
1583 	    if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_BLANK) != NULL
1584 			   && !vim_iswhite(line[i + j]) && line[i + j] != NUL)
1585 		continue;
1586 
1587 	    /*
1588 	     * We have found a match, stop searching.
1589 	     */
1590 	    i += j;
1591 	    got_com = TRUE;
1592 	    found_one = TRUE;
1593 	    break;
1594 	}
1595 
1596 	/*
1597 	 * No match found, stop scanning.
1598 	 */
1599 	if (!found_one)
1600 	    break;
1601 
1602 	/*
1603 	 * Include any trailing white space.
1604 	 */
1605 	while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))
1606 	    ++i;
1607 
1608 	/*
1609 	 * If this comment doesn't nest, stop here.
1610 	 */
1611 	if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1612 	    break;
1613     }
1614     return (got_com ? i : 0);
1615 }
1616 #endif
1617 
1618 /*
1619  * Return the number of window lines occupied by buffer line "lnum".
1620  */
1621     int
1622 plines(lnum)
1623     linenr_T	lnum;
1624 {
1625     return plines_win(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1626 }
1627 
1628     int
1629 plines_win(wp, lnum, winheight)
1630     win_T	*wp;
1631     linenr_T	lnum;
1632     int		winheight;	/* when TRUE limit to window height */
1633 {
1634 #if defined(FEAT_DIFF) || defined(PROTO)
1635     /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line.  When folded the result
1636      * is one line anyway. */
1637     return plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) + diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1638 }
1639 
1640     int
1641 plines_nofill(lnum)
1642     linenr_T	lnum;
1643 {
1644     return plines_win_nofill(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1645 }
1646 
1647     int
1648 plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight)
1649     win_T	*wp;
1650     linenr_T	lnum;
1651     int		winheight;	/* when TRUE limit to window height */
1652 {
1653 #endif
1654     int		lines;
1655 
1656     if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1657 	return 1;
1658 
1659 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1660     if (wp->w_width == 0)
1661 	return 1;
1662 #endif
1663 
1664 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1665     /* A folded lines is handled just like an empty line. */
1666     /* NOTE: Caller must handle lines that are MAYBE folded. */
1667     if (lineFolded(wp, lnum) == TRUE)
1668 	return 1;
1669 #endif
1670 
1671     lines = plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum);
1672     if (winheight > 0 && lines > wp->w_height)
1673 	return (int)wp->w_height;
1674     return lines;
1675 }
1676 
1677 /*
1678  * Return number of window lines physical line "lnum" will occupy in window
1679  * "wp".  Does not care about folding, 'wrap' or 'diff'.
1680  */
1681     int
1682 plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum)
1683     win_T	*wp;
1684     linenr_T	lnum;
1685 {
1686     char_u	*s;
1687     long	col;
1688     int		width;
1689 
1690     s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1691     if (*s == NUL)		/* empty line */
1692 	return 1;
1693     col = win_linetabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)MAXCOL);
1694 
1695     /*
1696      * If list mode is on, then the '$' at the end of the line may take up one
1697      * extra column.
1698      */
1699     if (wp->w_p_list && lcs_eol != NUL)
1700 	col += 1;
1701 
1702     /*
1703      * Add column offset for 'number' and 'foldcolumn'.
1704      */
1705     width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1706     if (width <= 0)
1707 	return 32000;
1708     if (col <= width)
1709 	return 1;
1710     col -= width;
1711     width += win_col_off2(wp);
1712     return (col + (width - 1)) / width + 1;
1713 }
1714 
1715 /*
1716  * Like plines_win(), but only reports the number of physical screen lines
1717  * used from the start of the line to the given column number.
1718  */
1719     int
1720 plines_win_col(wp, lnum, column)
1721     win_T	*wp;
1722     linenr_T	lnum;
1723     long	column;
1724 {
1725     long	col;
1726     char_u	*s;
1727     int		lines = 0;
1728     int		width;
1729 
1730 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1731     /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line.  When folded the result
1732      * is one line anyway. */
1733     lines = diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1734 #endif
1735 
1736     if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1737 	return lines + 1;
1738 
1739 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1740     if (wp->w_width == 0)
1741 	return lines + 1;
1742 #endif
1743 
1744     s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1745 
1746     col = 0;
1747     while (*s != NUL && --column >= 0)
1748     {
1749 	col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL);
1750 	mb_ptr_adv(s);
1751     }
1752 
1753     /*
1754      * If *s is a TAB, and the TAB is not displayed as ^I, and we're not in
1755      * INSERT mode, then col must be adjusted so that it represents the last
1756      * screen position of the TAB.  This only fixes an error when the TAB wraps
1757      * from one screen line to the next (when 'columns' is not a multiple of
1758      * 'ts') -- webb.
1759      */
1760     if (*s == TAB && (State & NORMAL) && (!wp->w_p_list || lcs_tab1))
1761 	col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL) - 1;
1762 
1763     /*
1764      * Add column offset for 'number', 'foldcolumn', etc.
1765      */
1766     width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1767     if (width > 0)
1768     {
1769 	lines += 1;
1770 	if (col >= width)
1771 	    lines += (col - width) / (width + win_col_off2(wp));
1772 	if (lines <= wp->w_height)
1773 	    return lines;
1774     }
1775     return (int)(wp->w_height);	    /* maximum length */
1776 }
1777 
1778     int
1779 plines_m_win(wp, first, last)
1780     win_T	*wp;
1781     linenr_T	first, last;
1782 {
1783     int		count = 0;
1784 
1785     while (first <= last)
1786     {
1787 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1788 	int	x;
1789 
1790 	/* Check if there are any really folded lines, but also included lines
1791 	 * that are maybe folded. */
1792 	x = foldedCount(wp, first, NULL);
1793 	if (x > 0)
1794 	{
1795 	    ++count;	    /* count 1 for "+-- folded" line */
1796 	    first += x;
1797 	}
1798 	else
1799 #endif
1800 	{
1801 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1802 	    if (first == wp->w_topline)
1803 		count += plines_win_nofill(wp, first, TRUE) + wp->w_topfill;
1804 	    else
1805 #endif
1806 		count += plines_win(wp, first, TRUE);
1807 	    ++first;
1808 	}
1809     }
1810     return (count);
1811 }
1812 
1813 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) || defined(PROTO)
1814 /*
1815  * Insert string "p" at the cursor position.  Stops at a NUL byte.
1816  * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1817  */
1818     void
1819 ins_bytes(p)
1820     char_u	*p;
1821 {
1822     ins_bytes_len(p, (int)STRLEN(p));
1823 }
1824 #endif
1825 
1826 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) \
1827 	|| defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1828 /*
1829  * Insert string "p" with length "len" at the cursor position.
1830  * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1831  */
1832     void
1833 ins_bytes_len(p, len)
1834     char_u	*p;
1835     int		len;
1836 {
1837     int		i;
1838 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1839     int		n;
1840 
1841     for (i = 0; i < len; i += n)
1842     {
1843 	n = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i);
1844 	ins_char_bytes(p + i, n);
1845     }
1846 # else
1847     for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
1848 	ins_char(p[i]);
1849 # endif
1850 }
1851 #endif
1852 
1853 /*
1854  * Insert or replace a single character at the cursor position.
1855  * When in REPLACE or VREPLACE mode, replace any existing character.
1856  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
1857  * For multi-byte characters we get the whole character, the caller must
1858  * convert bytes to a character.
1859  */
1860     void
1861 ins_char(c)
1862     int		c;
1863 {
1864 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1865     char_u	buf[MB_MAXBYTES];
1866     int		n;
1867 
1868     n = (*mb_char2bytes)(c, buf);
1869 
1870     /* When "c" is 0x100, 0x200, etc. we don't want to insert a NUL byte.
1871      * Happens for CTRL-Vu9900. */
1872     if (buf[0] == 0)
1873 	buf[0] = '\n';
1874 
1875     ins_char_bytes(buf, n);
1876 }
1877 
1878     void
1879 ins_char_bytes(buf, charlen)
1880     char_u	*buf;
1881     int		charlen;
1882 {
1883     int		c = buf[0];
1884     int		l, j;
1885 #endif
1886     int		newlen;		/* nr of bytes inserted */
1887     int		oldlen;		/* nr of bytes deleted (0 when not replacing) */
1888     char_u	*p;
1889     char_u	*newp;
1890     char_u	*oldp;
1891     int		linelen;	/* length of old line including NUL */
1892     colnr_T	col;
1893     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1894     int		i;
1895 
1896 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1897     /* Break tabs if needed. */
1898     if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
1899 	coladvance_force(getviscol());
1900 #endif
1901 
1902     col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1903     oldp = ml_get(lnum);
1904     linelen = (int)STRLEN(oldp) + 1;
1905 
1906     /* The lengths default to the values for when not replacing. */
1907     oldlen = 0;
1908 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1909     newlen = charlen;
1910 #else
1911     newlen = 1;
1912 #endif
1913 
1914     if (State & REPLACE_FLAG)
1915     {
1916 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1917 	if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1918 	{
1919 	    colnr_T	new_vcol = 0;   /* init for GCC */
1920 	    colnr_T	vcol;
1921 	    int		old_list;
1922 #ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1923 	    char_u	buf[2];
1924 #endif
1925 
1926 	    /*
1927 	     * Disable 'list' temporarily, unless 'cpo' contains the 'L' flag.
1928 	     * Returns the old value of list, so when finished,
1929 	     * curwin->w_p_list should be set back to this.
1930 	     */
1931 	    old_list = curwin->w_p_list;
1932 	    if (old_list && vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISTWM) == NULL)
1933 		curwin->w_p_list = FALSE;
1934 
1935 	    /*
1936 	     * In virtual replace mode each character may replace one or more
1937 	     * characters (zero if it's a TAB).  Count the number of bytes to
1938 	     * be deleted to make room for the new character, counting screen
1939 	     * cells.  May result in adding spaces to fill a gap.
1940 	     */
1941 	    getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, NULL, &vcol, NULL);
1942 #ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1943 	    buf[0] = c;
1944 	    buf[1] = NUL;
1945 #endif
1946 	    new_vcol = vcol + chartabsize(buf, vcol);
1947 	    while (oldp[col + oldlen] != NUL && vcol < new_vcol)
1948 	    {
1949 		vcol += chartabsize(oldp + col + oldlen, vcol);
1950 		/* Don't need to remove a TAB that takes us to the right
1951 		 * position. */
1952 		if (vcol > new_vcol && oldp[col + oldlen] == TAB)
1953 		    break;
1954 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1955 		oldlen += (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col + oldlen);
1956 #else
1957 		++oldlen;
1958 #endif
1959 		/* Deleted a bit too much, insert spaces. */
1960 		if (vcol > new_vcol)
1961 		    newlen += vcol - new_vcol;
1962 	    }
1963 	    curwin->w_p_list = old_list;
1964 	}
1965 	else
1966 #endif
1967 	    if (oldp[col] != NUL)
1968 	{
1969 	    /* normal replace */
1970 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1971 	    oldlen = (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col);
1972 #else
1973 	    oldlen = 1;
1974 #endif
1975 	}
1976 
1977 
1978 	/* Push the replaced bytes onto the replace stack, so that they can be
1979 	 * put back when BS is used.  The bytes of a multi-byte character are
1980 	 * done the other way around, so that the first byte is popped off
1981 	 * first (it tells the byte length of the character). */
1982 	replace_push(NUL);
1983 	for (i = 0; i < oldlen; ++i)
1984 	{
1985 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1986 	    l = (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col + i) - 1;
1987 	    for (j = l; j >= 0; --j)
1988 		replace_push(oldp[col + i + j]);
1989 	    i += l;
1990 #else
1991 	    replace_push(oldp[col + i]);
1992 #endif
1993 	}
1994     }
1995 
1996     newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(linelen + newlen - oldlen));
1997     if (newp == NULL)
1998 	return;
1999 
2000     /* Copy bytes before the cursor. */
2001     if (col > 0)
2002 	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2003 
2004     /* Copy bytes after the changed character(s). */
2005     p = newp + col;
2006     mch_memmove(p + newlen, oldp + col + oldlen,
2007 					    (size_t)(linelen - col - oldlen));
2008 
2009     /* Insert or overwrite the new character. */
2010 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2011     mch_memmove(p, buf, charlen);
2012     i = charlen;
2013 #else
2014     *p = c;
2015     i = 1;
2016 #endif
2017 
2018     /* Fill with spaces when necessary. */
2019     while (i < newlen)
2020 	p[i++] = ' ';
2021 
2022     /* Replace the line in the buffer. */
2023     ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2024 
2025     /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2026     changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2027 
2028     /*
2029      * If we're in Insert or Replace mode and 'showmatch' is set, then briefly
2030      * show the match for right parens and braces.
2031      */
2032     if (p_sm && (State & INSERT)
2033 	    && msg_silent == 0
2034 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2035 	    && charlen == 1
2036 #endif
2037        )
2038 	showmatch(c);
2039 
2040 #ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT
2041     if (!p_ri || (State & REPLACE_FLAG))
2042 #endif
2043     {
2044 	/* Normal insert: move cursor right */
2045 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2046 	curwin->w_cursor.col += charlen;
2047 #else
2048 	++curwin->w_cursor.col;
2049 #endif
2050     }
2051     /*
2052      * TODO: should try to update w_row here, to avoid recomputing it later.
2053      */
2054 }
2055 
2056 /*
2057  * Insert a string at the cursor position.
2058  * Note: Does NOT handle Replace mode.
2059  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2060  */
2061     void
2062 ins_str(s)
2063     char_u	*s;
2064 {
2065     char_u	*oldp, *newp;
2066     int		newlen = (int)STRLEN(s);
2067     int		oldlen;
2068     colnr_T	col;
2069     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2070 
2071 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2072     if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
2073 	coladvance_force(getviscol());
2074 #endif
2075 
2076     col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2077     oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2078     oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2079 
2080     newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(oldlen + newlen + 1));
2081     if (newp == NULL)
2082 	return;
2083     if (col > 0)
2084 	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2085     mch_memmove(newp + col, s, (size_t)newlen);
2086     mch_memmove(newp + col + newlen, oldp + col, (size_t)(oldlen - col + 1));
2087     ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2088     changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2089     curwin->w_cursor.col += newlen;
2090 }
2091 
2092 /*
2093  * Delete one character under the cursor.
2094  * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2095  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2096  *
2097  * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2098  */
2099     int
2100 del_char(fixpos)
2101     int		fixpos;
2102 {
2103 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2104     if (has_mbyte)
2105     {
2106 	/* Make sure the cursor is at the start of a character. */
2107 	mb_adjust_cursor();
2108 	if (*ml_get_cursor() == NUL)
2109 	    return FAIL;
2110 	return del_chars(1L, fixpos);
2111     }
2112 #endif
2113     return del_bytes(1L, fixpos, TRUE);
2114 }
2115 
2116 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
2117 /*
2118  * Like del_bytes(), but delete characters instead of bytes.
2119  */
2120     int
2121 del_chars(count, fixpos)
2122     long	count;
2123     int		fixpos;
2124 {
2125     long	bytes = 0;
2126     long	i;
2127     char_u	*p;
2128     int		l;
2129 
2130     p = ml_get_cursor();
2131     for (i = 0; i < count && *p != NUL; ++i)
2132     {
2133 	l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p);
2134 	bytes += l;
2135 	p += l;
2136     }
2137     return del_bytes(bytes, fixpos, TRUE);
2138 }
2139 #endif
2140 
2141 /*
2142  * Delete "count" bytes under the cursor.
2143  * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2144  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2145  *
2146  * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2147  */
2148 /*ARGSUSED*/
2149     int
2150 del_bytes(count, fixpos, use_delcombine)
2151     long	count;
2152     int		fixpos;
2153     int		use_delcombine;	    /* 'delcombine' option applies */
2154 {
2155     char_u	*oldp, *newp;
2156     colnr_T	oldlen;
2157     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2158     colnr_T	col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2159     int		was_alloced;
2160     long	movelen;
2161 
2162     oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2163     oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2164 
2165     /*
2166      * Can't do anything when the cursor is on the NUL after the line.
2167      */
2168     if (col >= oldlen)
2169 	return FAIL;
2170 
2171 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2172     /* If 'delcombine' is set and deleting (less than) one character, only
2173      * delete the last combining character. */
2174     if (p_deco && use_delcombine && enc_utf8
2175 					 && utfc_ptr2len(oldp + col) >= count)
2176     {
2177 	int	c1, c2;
2178 	int	n;
2179 
2180 	(void)utfc_ptr2char(oldp + col, &c1, &c2);
2181 	if (c1 != NUL)
2182 	{
2183 	    /* Find the last composing char, there can be several. */
2184 	    n = col;
2185 	    do
2186 	    {
2187 		col = n;
2188 		count = utf_ptr2len(oldp + n);
2189 		n += count;
2190 	    } while (UTF_COMPOSINGLIKE(oldp + col, oldp + n));
2191 	    fixpos = 0;
2192 	}
2193     }
2194 #endif
2195 
2196     /*
2197      * When count is too big, reduce it.
2198      */
2199     movelen = (long)oldlen - (long)col - count + 1; /* includes trailing NUL */
2200     if (movelen <= 1)
2201     {
2202 	/*
2203 	 * If we just took off the last character of a non-blank line, and
2204 	 * fixpos is TRUE, we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2205 	 */
2206 	if (col > 0 && fixpos)
2207 	{
2208 	    --curwin->w_cursor.col;
2209 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2210 	    curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
2211 #endif
2212 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2213 	    if (has_mbyte)
2214 		curwin->w_cursor.col -=
2215 			    (*mb_head_off)(oldp, oldp + curwin->w_cursor.col);
2216 #endif
2217 	}
2218 	count = oldlen - col;
2219 	movelen = 1;
2220     }
2221 
2222     /*
2223      * If the old line has been allocated the deletion can be done in the
2224      * existing line. Otherwise a new line has to be allocated
2225      */
2226     was_alloced = ml_line_alloced();	    /* check if oldp was allocated */
2227 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2228     if (was_alloced && usingNetbeans)
2229 	netbeans_removed(curbuf, lnum, col, count);
2230     /* else is handled by ml_replace() */
2231 #endif
2232     if (was_alloced)
2233 	newp = oldp;			    /* use same allocated memory */
2234     else
2235     {					    /* need to allocate a new line */
2236 	newp = alloc((unsigned)(oldlen + 1 - count));
2237 	if (newp == NULL)
2238 	    return FAIL;
2239 	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2240     }
2241     mch_memmove(newp + col, oldp + col + count, (size_t)movelen);
2242     if (!was_alloced)
2243 	ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2244 
2245     /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2246     changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2247 
2248     return OK;
2249 }
2250 
2251 /*
2252  * Delete from cursor to end of line.
2253  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2254  *
2255  * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2256  */
2257     int
2258 truncate_line(fixpos)
2259     int		fixpos;	    /* if TRUE fix the cursor position when done */
2260 {
2261     char_u	*newp;
2262     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2263     colnr_T	col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2264 
2265     if (col == 0)
2266 	newp = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
2267     else
2268 	newp = vim_strnsave(ml_get(lnum), col);
2269 
2270     if (newp == NULL)
2271 	return FAIL;
2272 
2273     ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2274 
2275     /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2276     changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2277 
2278     /*
2279      * If "fixpos" is TRUE we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2280      */
2281     if (fixpos && curwin->w_cursor.col > 0)
2282 	--curwin->w_cursor.col;
2283 
2284     return OK;
2285 }
2286 
2287 /*
2288  * Delete "nlines" lines at the cursor.
2289  * Saves the lines for undo first if "undo" is TRUE.
2290  */
2291     void
2292 del_lines(nlines, undo)
2293     long	nlines;		/* number of lines to delete */
2294     int		undo;		/* if TRUE, prepare for undo */
2295 {
2296     long	n;
2297 
2298     if (nlines <= 0)
2299 	return;
2300 
2301     /* save the deleted lines for undo */
2302     if (undo && u_savedel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, nlines) == FAIL)
2303 	return;
2304 
2305     for (n = 0; n < nlines; )
2306     {
2307 	if (curbuf->b_ml.ml_flags & ML_EMPTY)	    /* nothing to delete */
2308 	    break;
2309 
2310 	ml_delete(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE);
2311 	++n;
2312 
2313 	/* If we delete the last line in the file, stop */
2314 	if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
2315 	    break;
2316     }
2317     /* adjust marks, mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2318     deleted_lines_mark(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, n);
2319 
2320     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
2321     check_cursor_lnum();
2322 }
2323 
2324     int
2325 gchar_pos(pos)
2326     pos_T *pos;
2327 {
2328     char_u	*ptr = ml_get_pos(pos);
2329 
2330 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2331     if (has_mbyte)
2332 	return (*mb_ptr2char)(ptr);
2333 #endif
2334     return (int)*ptr;
2335 }
2336 
2337     int
2338 gchar_cursor()
2339 {
2340 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2341     if (has_mbyte)
2342 	return (*mb_ptr2char)(ml_get_cursor());
2343 #endif
2344     return (int)*ml_get_cursor();
2345 }
2346 
2347 /*
2348  * Write a character at the current cursor position.
2349  * It is directly written into the block.
2350  */
2351     void
2352 pchar_cursor(c)
2353     int c;
2354 {
2355     *(ml_get_buf(curbuf, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE)
2356 						  + curwin->w_cursor.col) = c;
2357 }
2358 
2359 #if 0 /* not used */
2360 /*
2361  * Put *pos at end of current buffer
2362  */
2363     void
2364 goto_endofbuf(pos)
2365     pos_T    *pos;
2366 {
2367     char_u  *p;
2368 
2369     pos->lnum = curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count;
2370     pos->col = 0;
2371     p = ml_get(pos->lnum);
2372     while (*p++)
2373 	++pos->col;
2374 }
2375 #endif
2376 
2377 /*
2378  * When extra == 0: Return TRUE if the cursor is before or on the first
2379  *		    non-blank in the line.
2380  * When extra == 1: Return TRUE if the cursor is before the first non-blank in
2381  *		    the line.
2382  */
2383     int
2384 inindent(extra)
2385     int	    extra;
2386 {
2387     char_u	*ptr;
2388     colnr_T	col;
2389 
2390     for (col = 0, ptr = ml_get_curline(); vim_iswhite(*ptr); ++col)
2391 	++ptr;
2392     if (col >= curwin->w_cursor.col + extra)
2393 	return TRUE;
2394     else
2395 	return FALSE;
2396 }
2397 
2398 /*
2399  * Skip to next part of an option argument: Skip space and comma.
2400  */
2401     char_u *
2402 skip_to_option_part(p)
2403     char_u  *p;
2404 {
2405     if (*p == ',')
2406 	++p;
2407     while (*p == ' ')
2408 	++p;
2409     return p;
2410 }
2411 
2412 /*
2413  * changed() is called when something in the current buffer is changed.
2414  *
2415  * Most often called through changed_bytes() and changed_lines(), which also
2416  * mark the area of the display to be redrawn.
2417  */
2418     void
2419 changed()
2420 {
2421 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK)
2422     /* The text of the preediting area is inserted, but this doesn't
2423      * mean a change of the buffer yet.  That is delayed until the
2424      * text is committed. (this means preedit becomes empty) */
2425     if (im_is_preediting() && !xim_changed_while_preediting)
2426 	return;
2427     xim_changed_while_preediting = FALSE;
2428 #endif
2429 
2430     if (!curbuf->b_changed)
2431     {
2432 	int	save_msg_scroll = msg_scroll;
2433 
2434 	change_warning(0);
2435 	/* Create a swap file if that is wanted.
2436 	 * Don't do this for "nofile" and "nowrite" buffer types. */
2437 	if (curbuf->b_may_swap
2438 #ifdef FEAT_QUICKFIX
2439 		&& !bt_dontwrite(curbuf)
2440 #endif
2441 		)
2442 	{
2443 	    ml_open_file(curbuf);
2444 
2445 	    /* The ml_open_file() can cause an ATTENTION message.
2446 	     * Wait two seconds, to make sure the user reads this unexpected
2447 	     * message.  Since we could be anywhere, call wait_return() now,
2448 	     * and don't let the emsg() set msg_scroll. */
2449 	    if (need_wait_return && emsg_silent == 0)
2450 	    {
2451 		out_flush();
2452 		ui_delay(2000L, TRUE);
2453 		wait_return(TRUE);
2454 		msg_scroll = save_msg_scroll;
2455 	    }
2456 	}
2457 	curbuf->b_changed = TRUE;
2458 	ml_setflags(curbuf);
2459 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2460 	check_status(curbuf);
2461 #endif
2462 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2463 	need_maketitle = TRUE;	    /* set window title later */
2464 #endif
2465     }
2466     ++curbuf->b_changedtick;
2467 }
2468 
2469 static void changedOneline __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum));
2470 static void changed_lines_buf __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
2471 static void changed_common __ARGS((linenr_T lnum, colnr_T col, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
2472 
2473 /*
2474  * Changed bytes within a single line for the current buffer.
2475  * - marks the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2476  * - marks the buffer changed by calling changed()
2477  * - invalidates cached values
2478  */
2479     void
2480 changed_bytes(lnum, col)
2481     linenr_T	lnum;
2482     colnr_T	col;
2483 {
2484     changedOneline(curbuf, lnum);
2485     changed_common(lnum, col, lnum + 1, 0L);
2486 
2487 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2488     /* Diff highlighting in other diff windows may need to be updated too. */
2489     if (curwin->w_p_diff)
2490     {
2491 	win_T	    *wp;
2492 	linenr_T    wlnum;
2493 
2494 	for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2495 	    if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2496 	    {
2497 		redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2498 		wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2499 		if (wlnum > 0)
2500 		    changedOneline(wp->w_buffer, wlnum);
2501 	    }
2502     }
2503 #endif
2504 }
2505 
2506     static void
2507 changedOneline(buf, lnum)
2508     buf_T	*buf;
2509     linenr_T	lnum;
2510 {
2511     if (buf->b_mod_set)
2512     {
2513 	/* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
2514 	if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2515 	    buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2516 	else if (lnum >= buf->b_mod_bot)
2517 	    buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
2518     }
2519     else
2520     {
2521 	/* set the area that must be redisplayed to one line */
2522 	buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2523 	buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2524 	buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
2525 	buf->b_mod_xlines = 0;
2526     }
2527 }
2528 
2529 /*
2530  * Appended "count" lines below line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2531  * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2532  * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2533  */
2534     void
2535 appended_lines(lnum, count)
2536     linenr_T	lnum;
2537     long	count;
2538 {
2539     changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2540 }
2541 
2542 /*
2543  * Like appended_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2544  */
2545     void
2546 appended_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2547     linenr_T	lnum;
2548     long	count;
2549 {
2550     mark_adjust(lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, count, 0L);
2551     changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2552 }
2553 
2554 /*
2555  * Deleted "count" lines at line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2556  * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2557  * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2558  */
2559     void
2560 deleted_lines(lnum, count)
2561     linenr_T	lnum;
2562     long	count;
2563 {
2564     changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2565 }
2566 
2567 /*
2568  * Like deleted_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2569  */
2570     void
2571 deleted_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2572     linenr_T	lnum;
2573     long	count;
2574 {
2575     mark_adjust(lnum, (linenr_T)(lnum + count - 1), (long)MAXLNUM, -count);
2576     changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2577 }
2578 
2579 /*
2580  * Changed lines for the current buffer.
2581  * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2582  * - mark the buffer changed by calling changed()
2583  * - mark the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2584  * - invalidate cached values
2585  * "lnum" is the first line that needs displaying, "lnume" the first line
2586  * below the changed lines (BEFORE the change).
2587  * When only inserting lines, "lnum" and "lnume" are equal.
2588  * Takes care of calling changed() and updating b_mod_*.
2589  */
2590     void
2591 changed_lines(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2592     linenr_T	lnum;	    /* first line with change */
2593     colnr_T	col;	    /* column in first line with change */
2594     linenr_T	lnume;	    /* line below last changed line */
2595     long	xtra;	    /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2596 {
2597     changed_lines_buf(curbuf, lnum, lnume, xtra);
2598 
2599 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2600     if (xtra == 0 && curwin->w_p_diff)
2601     {
2602 	/* When the number of lines doesn't change then mark_adjust() isn't
2603 	 * called and other diff buffers still need to be marked for
2604 	 * displaying. */
2605 	win_T	    *wp;
2606 	linenr_T    wlnum;
2607 
2608 	for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2609 	    if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2610 	    {
2611 		redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2612 		wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2613 		if (wlnum > 0)
2614 		    changed_lines_buf(wp->w_buffer, wlnum,
2615 						    lnume - lnum + wlnum, 0L);
2616 	    }
2617     }
2618 #endif
2619 
2620     changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra);
2621 }
2622 
2623     static void
2624 changed_lines_buf(buf, lnum, lnume, xtra)
2625     buf_T	*buf;
2626     linenr_T	lnum;	    /* first line with change */
2627     linenr_T	lnume;	    /* line below last changed line */
2628     long	xtra;	    /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2629 {
2630     if (buf->b_mod_set)
2631     {
2632 	/* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
2633 	if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2634 	    buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2635 	if (lnum < buf->b_mod_bot)
2636 	{
2637 	    /* adjust old bot position for xtra lines */
2638 	    buf->b_mod_bot += xtra;
2639 	    if (buf->b_mod_bot < lnum)
2640 		buf->b_mod_bot = lnum;
2641 	}
2642 	if (lnume + xtra > buf->b_mod_bot)
2643 	    buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2644 	buf->b_mod_xlines += xtra;
2645     }
2646     else
2647     {
2648 	/* set the area that must be redisplayed */
2649 	buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2650 	buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2651 	buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2652 	buf->b_mod_xlines = xtra;
2653     }
2654 }
2655 
2656     static void
2657 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2658     linenr_T	lnum;
2659     colnr_T	col;
2660     linenr_T	lnume;
2661     long	xtra;
2662 {
2663     win_T	*wp;
2664     int		i;
2665 #ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2666     int		cols;
2667     pos_T	*p;
2668     int		add;
2669 #endif
2670 
2671     /* mark the buffer as modified */
2672     changed();
2673 
2674     /* set the '. mark */
2675     if (!cmdmod.keepjumps)
2676     {
2677 	curbuf->b_last_change.lnum = lnum;
2678 	curbuf->b_last_change.col = col;
2679 
2680 #ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2681 	/* Create a new entry if a new undo-able change was started or we
2682 	 * don't have an entry yet. */
2683 	if (curbuf->b_new_change || curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2684 	{
2685 	    if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2686 		add = TRUE;
2687 	    else
2688 	    {
2689 		/* Don't create a new entry when the line number is the same
2690 		 * as the last one and the column is not too far away.  Avoids
2691 		 * creating many entries for typing "xxxxx". */
2692 		p = &curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1];
2693 		if (p->lnum != lnum)
2694 		    add = TRUE;
2695 		else
2696 		{
2697 		    cols = comp_textwidth(FALSE);
2698 		    if (cols == 0)
2699 			cols = 79;
2700 		    add = (p->col + cols < col || col + cols < p->col);
2701 		}
2702 	    }
2703 	    if (add)
2704 	    {
2705 		/* This is the first of a new sequence of undo-able changes
2706 		 * and it's at some distance of the last change.  Use a new
2707 		 * position in the changelist. */
2708 		curbuf->b_new_change = FALSE;
2709 
2710 		if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == JUMPLISTSIZE)
2711 		{
2712 		    /* changelist is full: remove oldest entry */
2713 		    curbuf->b_changelistlen = JUMPLISTSIZE - 1;
2714 		    mch_memmove(curbuf->b_changelist, curbuf->b_changelist + 1,
2715 					  sizeof(pos_T) * (JUMPLISTSIZE - 1));
2716 		    FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2717 		    {
2718 			/* Correct position in changelist for other windows on
2719 			 * this buffer. */
2720 			if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf && wp->w_changelistidx > 0)
2721 			    --wp->w_changelistidx;
2722 		    }
2723 		}
2724 		FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2725 		{
2726 		    /* For other windows, if the position in the changelist is
2727 		     * at the end it stays at the end. */
2728 		    if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf
2729 			    && wp->w_changelistidx == curbuf->b_changelistlen)
2730 			++wp->w_changelistidx;
2731 		}
2732 		++curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2733 	    }
2734 	}
2735 	curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1] =
2736 							curbuf->b_last_change;
2737 	/* The current window is always after the last change, so that "g,"
2738 	 * takes you back to it. */
2739 	curwin->w_changelistidx = curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2740 #endif
2741     }
2742 
2743     FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2744     {
2745 	if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf)
2746 	{
2747 	    /* Mark this window to be redrawn later. */
2748 	    if (wp->w_redr_type < VALID)
2749 		wp->w_redr_type = VALID;
2750 
2751 	    /* Check if a change in the buffer has invalidated the cached
2752 	     * values for the cursor. */
2753 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2754 	    /*
2755 	     * Update the folds for this window.  Can't postpone this, because
2756 	     * a following operator might work on the whole fold: ">>dd".
2757 	     */
2758 	    foldUpdate(wp, lnum, lnume + xtra - 1);
2759 
2760 	    /* The change may cause lines above or below the change to become
2761 	     * included in a fold.  Set lnum/lnume to the first/last line that
2762 	     * might be displayed differently.
2763 	     * Set w_cline_folded here as an efficient way to update it when
2764 	     * inserting lines just above a closed fold. */
2765 	    i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnum, &lnum, NULL, FALSE, NULL);
2766 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum)
2767 		wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2768 	    i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnume, NULL, &lnume, FALSE, NULL);
2769 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnume)
2770 		wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2771 
2772 	    /* If the changed line is in a range of previously folded lines,
2773 	     * compare with the first line in that range. */
2774 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum <= lnum)
2775 	    {
2776 		i = find_wl_entry(wp, lnum);
2777 		if (i >= 0 && wp->w_cursor.lnum > wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum)
2778 		    changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2779 	    }
2780 #endif
2781 
2782 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum > lnum)
2783 		changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2784 	    else if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum && wp->w_cursor.col >= col)
2785 		changed_cline_bef_curs_win(wp);
2786 	    if (wp->w_botline >= lnum)
2787 	    {
2788 		/* Assume that botline doesn't change (inserted lines make
2789 		 * other lines scroll down below botline). */
2790 		approximate_botline_win(wp);
2791 	    }
2792 
2793 	    /* Check if any w_lines[] entries have become invalid.
2794 	     * For entries below the change: Correct the lnums for
2795 	     * inserted/deleted lines.  Makes it possible to stop displaying
2796 	     * after the change. */
2797 	    for (i = 0; i < wp->w_lines_valid; ++i)
2798 		if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid)
2799 		{
2800 		    if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum >= lnum)
2801 		    {
2802 			if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum < lnume)
2803 			{
2804 			    /* line included in change */
2805 			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2806 			}
2807 			else if (xtra != 0)
2808 			{
2809 			    /* line below change */
2810 			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum += xtra;
2811 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2812 			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum += xtra;
2813 #endif
2814 			}
2815 		    }
2816 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2817 		    else if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum >= lnum)
2818 		    {
2819 			/* change somewhere inside this range of folded lines,
2820 			 * may need to be redrawn */
2821 			wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2822 		    }
2823 #endif
2824 		}
2825 	}
2826     }
2827 
2828     /* Call update_screen() later, which checks out what needs to be redrawn,
2829      * since it notices b_mod_set and then uses b_mod_*. */
2830     if (must_redraw < VALID)
2831 	must_redraw = VALID;
2832 }
2833 
2834 /*
2835  * unchanged() is called when the changed flag must be reset for buffer 'buf'
2836  */
2837     void
2838 unchanged(buf, ff)
2839     buf_T	*buf;
2840     int		ff;	/* also reset 'fileformat' */
2841 {
2842     if (buf->b_changed || (ff && file_ff_differs(buf)))
2843     {
2844 	buf->b_changed = 0;
2845 	ml_setflags(buf);
2846 	if (ff)
2847 	    save_file_ff(buf);
2848 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2849 	check_status(buf);
2850 #endif
2851 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2852 	need_maketitle = TRUE;	    /* set window title later */
2853 #endif
2854     }
2855     ++buf->b_changedtick;
2856 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2857     netbeans_unmodified(buf);
2858 #endif
2859 }
2860 
2861 #if defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(PROTO)
2862 /*
2863  * check_status: called when the status bars for the buffer 'buf'
2864  *		 need to be updated
2865  */
2866     void
2867 check_status(buf)
2868     buf_T	*buf;
2869 {
2870     win_T	*wp;
2871 
2872     for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2873 	if (wp->w_buffer == buf && wp->w_status_height)
2874 	{
2875 	    wp->w_redr_status = TRUE;
2876 	    if (must_redraw < VALID)
2877 		must_redraw = VALID;
2878 	}
2879 }
2880 #endif
2881 
2882 /*
2883  * If the file is readonly, give a warning message with the first change.
2884  * Don't do this for autocommands.
2885  * Don't use emsg(), because it flushes the macro buffer.
2886  * If we have undone all changes b_changed will be FALSE, but "b_did_warn"
2887  * will be TRUE.
2888  */
2889     void
2890 change_warning(col)
2891     int	    col;		/* column for message; non-zero when in insert
2892 				   mode and 'showmode' is on */
2893 {
2894     if (curbuf->b_did_warn == FALSE
2895 	    && curbufIsChanged() == 0
2896 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2897 	    && !autocmd_busy
2898 #endif
2899 	    && curbuf->b_p_ro)
2900     {
2901 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2902 	apply_autocmds(EVENT_FILECHANGEDRO, NULL, NULL, FALSE, curbuf);
2903 	if (!curbuf->b_p_ro)
2904 	    return;
2905 #endif
2906 	/*
2907 	 * Do what msg() does, but with a column offset if the warning should
2908 	 * be after the mode message.
2909 	 */
2910 	msg_start();
2911 	if (msg_row == Rows - 1)
2912 	    msg_col = col;
2913 	msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
2914 	MSG_PUTS_ATTR(_("W10: Warning: Changing a readonly file"),
2915 						   hl_attr(HLF_W) | MSG_HIST);
2916 	msg_clr_eos();
2917 	(void)msg_end();
2918 	if (msg_silent == 0 && !silent_mode)
2919 	{
2920 	    out_flush();
2921 	    ui_delay(1000L, TRUE); /* give the user time to think about it */
2922 	}
2923 	curbuf->b_did_warn = TRUE;
2924 	redraw_cmdline = FALSE;	/* don't redraw and erase the message */
2925 	if (msg_row < Rows - 1)
2926 	    showmode();
2927     }
2928 }
2929 
2930 /*
2931  * Ask for a reply from the user, a 'y' or a 'n'.
2932  * No other characters are accepted, the message is repeated until a valid
2933  * reply is entered or CTRL-C is hit.
2934  * If direct is TRUE, don't use vgetc() but ui_inchar(), don't get characters
2935  * from any buffers but directly from the user.
2936  *
2937  * return the 'y' or 'n'
2938  */
2939     int
2940 ask_yesno(str, direct)
2941     char_u  *str;
2942     int	    direct;
2943 {
2944     int	    r = ' ';
2945     int	    save_State = State;
2946 
2947     if (exiting)		/* put terminal in raw mode for this question */
2948 	settmode(TMODE_RAW);
2949     ++no_wait_return;
2950 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
2951     dont_scroll = TRUE;		/* disallow scrolling here */
2952 #endif
2953     State = CONFIRM;		/* mouse behaves like with :confirm */
2954 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2955     setmouse();			/* disables mouse for xterm */
2956 #endif
2957     ++no_mapping;
2958     ++allow_keys;		/* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
2959 
2960     while (r != 'y' && r != 'n')
2961     {
2962 	/* same highlighting as for wait_return */
2963 	smsg_attr(hl_attr(HLF_R), (char_u *)"%s (y/n)?", str);
2964 	if (direct)
2965 	    r = get_keystroke();
2966 	else
2967 	    r = safe_vgetc();
2968 	if (r == Ctrl_C || r == ESC)
2969 	    r = 'n';
2970 	msg_putchar(r);	    /* show what you typed */
2971 	out_flush();
2972     }
2973     --no_wait_return;
2974     State = save_State;
2975 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2976     setmouse();
2977 #endif
2978     --no_mapping;
2979     --allow_keys;
2980 
2981     return r;
2982 }
2983 
2984 /*
2985  * Get a key stroke directly from the user.
2986  * Ignores mouse clicks and scrollbar events, except a click for the left
2987  * button (used at the more prompt).
2988  * Doesn't use vgetc(), because it syncs undo and eats mapped characters.
2989  * Disadvantage: typeahead is ignored.
2990  * Translates the interrupt character for unix to ESC.
2991  */
2992     int
2993 get_keystroke()
2994 {
2995 #define CBUFLEN 151
2996     char_u	buf[CBUFLEN];
2997     int		len = 0;
2998     int		n;
2999     int		save_mapped_ctrl_c = mapped_ctrl_c;
3000 
3001     mapped_ctrl_c = FALSE;	/* mappings are not used here */
3002     for (;;)
3003     {
3004 	cursor_on();
3005 	out_flush();
3006 
3007 	/* First time: blocking wait.  Second time: wait up to 100ms for a
3008 	 * terminal code to complete.  Leave some room for check_termcode() to
3009 	 * insert a key code into (max 5 chars plus NUL).  And
3010 	 * fix_input_buffer() can triple the number of bytes. */
3011 	n = ui_inchar(buf + len, (CBUFLEN - 6 - len) / 3,
3012 						    len == 0 ? -1L : 100L, 0);
3013 	if (n > 0)
3014 	{
3015 	    /* Replace zero and CSI by a special key code. */
3016 	    n = fix_input_buffer(buf + len, n, FALSE);
3017 	    len += n;
3018 	}
3019 
3020 	/* incomplete termcode: get more characters */
3021 	if ((n = check_termcode(1, buf, len)) < 0)
3022 	    continue;
3023 	/* found a termcode: adjust length */
3024 	if (n > 0)
3025 	    len = n;
3026 	if (len == 0)	    /* nothing typed yet */
3027 	    continue;
3028 
3029 	/* Handle modifier and/or special key code. */
3030 	n = buf[0];
3031 	if (n == K_SPECIAL)
3032 	{
3033 	    n = TO_SPECIAL(buf[1], buf[2]);
3034 	    if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER
3035 		    || n == K_IGNORE
3036 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3037 		    || n == K_LEFTMOUSE_NM
3038 		    || n == K_LEFTDRAG
3039 		    || n == K_LEFTRELEASE
3040 		    || n == K_LEFTRELEASE_NM
3041 		    || n == K_MIDDLEMOUSE
3042 		    || n == K_MIDDLEDRAG
3043 		    || n == K_MIDDLERELEASE
3044 		    || n == K_RIGHTMOUSE
3045 		    || n == K_RIGHTDRAG
3046 		    || n == K_RIGHTRELEASE
3047 		    || n == K_MOUSEDOWN
3048 		    || n == K_MOUSEUP
3049 		    || n == K_X1MOUSE
3050 		    || n == K_X1DRAG
3051 		    || n == K_X1RELEASE
3052 		    || n == K_X2MOUSE
3053 		    || n == K_X2DRAG
3054 		    || n == K_X2RELEASE
3055 # ifdef FEAT_GUI
3056 		    || n == K_VER_SCROLLBAR
3057 		    || n == K_HOR_SCROLLBAR
3058 # endif
3059 #endif
3060 	       )
3061 	    {
3062 		if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER)
3063 		    mod_mask = buf[2];
3064 		len -= 3;
3065 		if (len > 0)
3066 		    mch_memmove(buf, buf + 3, (size_t)len);
3067 		continue;
3068 	    }
3069 	}
3070 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
3071 	if (has_mbyte)
3072 	{
3073 	    if (MB_BYTE2LEN(n) > len)
3074 		continue;	/* more bytes to get */
3075 	    buf[len >= CBUFLEN ? CBUFLEN - 1 : len] = NUL;
3076 	    n = (*mb_ptr2char)(buf);
3077 	}
3078 #endif
3079 #ifdef UNIX
3080 	if (n == intr_char)
3081 	    n = ESC;
3082 #endif
3083 	break;
3084     }
3085 
3086     mapped_ctrl_c = save_mapped_ctrl_c;
3087     return n;
3088 }
3089 
3090 /*
3091  * Get a number from the user.
3092  * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse.
3093  */
3094     int
3095 get_number(colon, mouse_used)
3096     int	    colon;			/* allow colon to abort */
3097     int	    *mouse_used;
3098 {
3099     int	n = 0;
3100     int	c;
3101 
3102     if (mouse_used != NULL)
3103 	*mouse_used = FALSE;
3104 
3105     /* When not printing messages, the user won't know what to type, return a
3106      * zero (as if CR was hit). */
3107     if (msg_silent != 0)
3108 	return 0;
3109 
3110 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
3111     dont_scroll = TRUE;		/* disallow scrolling here */
3112 #endif
3113     ++no_mapping;
3114     ++allow_keys;		/* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
3115     for (;;)
3116     {
3117 	windgoto(msg_row, msg_col);
3118 	c = safe_vgetc();
3119 	if (VIM_ISDIGIT(c))
3120 	{
3121 	    n = n * 10 + c - '0';
3122 	    msg_putchar(c);
3123 	}
3124 	else if (c == K_DEL || c == K_KDEL || c == K_BS || c == Ctrl_H)
3125 	{
3126 	    n /= 10;
3127 	    MSG_PUTS("\b \b");
3128 	}
3129 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3130 	else if (mouse_used != NULL && c == K_LEFTMOUSE)
3131 	{
3132 	    *mouse_used = TRUE;
3133 	    n = mouse_row + 1;
3134 	    break;
3135 	}
3136 #endif
3137 	else if (n == 0 && c == ':' && colon)
3138 	{
3139 	    stuffcharReadbuff(':');
3140 	    if (!exmode_active)
3141 		cmdline_row = msg_row;
3142 	    skip_redraw = TRUE;	    /* skip redraw once */
3143 	    do_redraw = FALSE;
3144 	    break;
3145 	}
3146 	else if (c == CAR || c == NL || c == Ctrl_C || c == ESC)
3147 	    break;
3148     }
3149     --no_mapping;
3150     --allow_keys;
3151     return n;
3152 }
3153 
3154 /*
3155  * Ask the user to enter a number.
3156  * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse and in that case return
3157  * the line number.
3158  */
3159     int
3160 prompt_for_number(mouse_used)
3161     int		*mouse_used;
3162 {
3163     int		i;
3164     int		save_cmdline_row;
3165     int		save_State;
3166 
3167     /* When using ":silent" assume that <CR> was entered. */
3168     if (mouse_used != NULL)
3169 	MSG_PUTS(_("Type number or click with mouse (<Enter> cancels): "));
3170     else
3171 	MSG_PUTS(_("Choice number (<Enter> cancels): "));
3172 
3173     /* Set the state such that text can be selected/copied/pasted. */
3174     save_cmdline_row = cmdline_row;
3175     cmdline_row = Rows - 1;
3176     save_State = State;
3177     if (mouse_used == NULL)
3178 	State = CMDLINE;
3179     else
3180 	State = NORMAL;
3181 
3182     i = get_number(TRUE, mouse_used);
3183     if (KeyTyped)
3184     {
3185 	/* don't call wait_return() now */
3186 	/* msg_putchar('\n'); */
3187 	cmdline_row = msg_row - 1;
3188 	need_wait_return = FALSE;
3189 	msg_didany = FALSE;
3190     }
3191     else
3192 	cmdline_row = save_cmdline_row;
3193     State = save_State;
3194 
3195     return i;
3196 }
3197 
3198     void
3199 msgmore(n)
3200     long n;
3201 {
3202     long pn;
3203 
3204     if (global_busy	    /* no messages now, wait until global is finished */
3205 	    || !messaging())  /* 'lazyredraw' set, don't do messages now */
3206 	return;
3207 
3208     /* We don't want to overwrite another important message, but do overwrite
3209      * a previous "more lines" or "fewer lines" message, so that "5dd" and
3210      * then "put" reports the last action. */
3211     if (keep_msg != NULL && !keep_msg_more)
3212 	return;
3213 
3214     if (n > 0)
3215 	pn = n;
3216     else
3217 	pn = -n;
3218 
3219     if (pn > p_report)
3220     {
3221 	if (pn == 1)
3222 	{
3223 	    if (n > 0)
3224 		STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 more line"));
3225 	    else
3226 		STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 line less"));
3227 	}
3228 	else
3229 	{
3230 	    if (n > 0)
3231 		sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld more lines"), pn);
3232 	    else
3233 		sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld fewer lines"), pn);
3234 	}
3235 	if (got_int)
3236 	    STRCAT(msg_buf, _(" (Interrupted)"));
3237 	if (msg(msg_buf))
3238 	{
3239 	    set_keep_msg(msg_buf);
3240 	    keep_msg_attr = 0;
3241 	    keep_msg_more = TRUE;
3242 	}
3243     }
3244 }
3245 
3246 /*
3247  * flush map and typeahead buffers and give a warning for an error
3248  */
3249     void
3250 beep_flush()
3251 {
3252     if (emsg_silent == 0)
3253     {
3254 	flush_buffers(FALSE);
3255 	vim_beep();
3256     }
3257 }
3258 
3259 /*
3260  * give a warning for an error
3261  */
3262     void
3263 vim_beep()
3264 {
3265     if (emsg_silent == 0)
3266     {
3267 	if (p_vb
3268 #ifdef FEAT_GUI
3269 		/* While the GUI is starting up the termcap is set for the GUI
3270 		 * but the output still goes to a terminal. */
3271 		&& !(gui.in_use && gui.starting)
3272 #endif
3273 		)
3274 	{
3275 	    out_str(T_VB);
3276 	}
3277 	else
3278 	{
3279 #ifdef MSDOS
3280 	    /*
3281 	     * The number of beeps outputted is reduced to avoid having to wait
3282 	     * for all the beeps to finish. This is only a problem on systems
3283 	     * where the beeps don't overlap.
3284 	     */
3285 	    if (beep_count == 0 || beep_count == 10)
3286 	    {
3287 		out_char(BELL);
3288 		beep_count = 1;
3289 	    }
3290 	    else
3291 		++beep_count;
3292 #else
3293 	    out_char(BELL);
3294 #endif
3295 	}
3296 
3297 	/* When 'verbose' is set and we are sourcing a script or executing a
3298 	 * function give the user a hint where the beep comes from. */
3299 	if (vim_strchr(p_debug, 'e') != NULL)
3300 	{
3301 	    msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
3302 	    msg_attr((char_u *)_("Beep!"), hl_attr(HLF_W));
3303 	}
3304     }
3305 }
3306 
3307 /*
3308  * To get the "real" home directory:
3309  * - get value of $HOME
3310  * For Unix:
3311  *  - go to that directory
3312  *  - do mch_dirname() to get the real name of that directory.
3313  *  This also works with mounts and links.
3314  *  Don't do this for MS-DOS, it will change the "current dir" for a drive.
3315  */
3316 static char_u	*homedir = NULL;
3317 
3318     void
3319 init_homedir()
3320 {
3321     char_u  *var;
3322 
3323     /* In case we are called a second time (when 'encoding' changes). */
3324     vim_free(homedir);
3325     homedir = NULL;
3326 
3327 #ifdef VMS
3328     var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
3329 #else
3330     var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
3331 #endif
3332 
3333     if (var != NULL && *var == NUL)	/* empty is same as not set */
3334 	var = NULL;
3335 
3336 #ifdef WIN3264
3337     /*
3338      * Weird but true: $HOME may contain an indirect reference to another
3339      * variable, esp. "%USERPROFILE%".  Happens when $USERPROFILE isn't set
3340      * when $HOME is being set.
3341      */
3342     if (var != NULL && *var == '%')
3343     {
3344 	char_u	*p;
3345 	char_u	*exp;
3346 
3347 	p = vim_strchr(var + 1, '%');
3348 	if (p != NULL)
3349 	{
3350 	    vim_strncpy(NameBuff, var + 1, p - (var + 1));
3351 	    exp = mch_getenv(NameBuff);
3352 	    if (exp != NULL && *exp != NUL
3353 					&& STRLEN(exp) + STRLEN(p) < MAXPATHL)
3354 	    {
3355 		vim_snprintf((char *)NameBuff, MAXPATHL, "%s%s", exp, p + 1);
3356 		var = NameBuff;
3357 		/* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3358 		vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3359 	    }
3360 	}
3361     }
3362 
3363     /*
3364      * Typically, $HOME is not defined on Windows, unless the user has
3365      * specifically defined it for Vim's sake.  However, on Windows NT
3366      * platforms, $HOMEDRIVE and $HOMEPATH are automatically defined for
3367      * each user.  Try constructing $HOME from these.
3368      */
3369     if (var == NULL)
3370     {
3371 	char_u *homedrive, *homepath;
3372 
3373 	homedrive = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEDRIVE");
3374 	homepath = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEPATH");
3375 	if (homedrive != NULL && homepath != NULL
3376 			   && STRLEN(homedrive) + STRLEN(homepath) < MAXPATHL)
3377 	{
3378 	    sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", homedrive, homepath);
3379 	    if (NameBuff[0] != NUL)
3380 	    {
3381 		var = NameBuff;
3382 		/* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3383 		vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3384 	    }
3385 	}
3386     }
3387 
3388 # if defined(FEAT_MBYTE)
3389     if (enc_utf8 && var != NULL)
3390     {
3391 	int	len;
3392 	char_u  *pp;
3393 
3394 	/* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8.  Other conversions are
3395 	 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3396 	acp_to_enc(var, STRLEN(var), &pp, &len);
3397 	if (pp != NULL)
3398 	{
3399 	    homedir = pp;
3400 	    return;
3401 	}
3402     }
3403 # endif
3404 #endif
3405 
3406 #if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3407     /*
3408      * Default home dir is C:/
3409      * Best assumption we can make in such a situation.
3410      */
3411     if (var == NULL)
3412 	var = "C:/";
3413 #endif
3414     if (var != NULL)
3415     {
3416 #ifdef UNIX
3417 	/*
3418 	 * Change to the directory and get the actual path.  This resolves
3419 	 * links.  Don't do it when we can't return.
3420 	 */
3421 	if (mch_dirname(NameBuff, MAXPATHL) == OK
3422 					  && mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) == 0)
3423 	{
3424 	    if (!mch_chdir((char *)var) && mch_dirname(IObuff, IOSIZE) == OK)
3425 		var = IObuff;
3426 	    if (mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) != 0)
3427 		EMSG(_(e_prev_dir));
3428 	}
3429 #endif
3430 	homedir = vim_strsave(var);
3431     }
3432 }
3433 
3434 #if defined(EXITFREE) || defined(PROTO)
3435     void
3436 free_homedir()
3437 {
3438     vim_free(homedir);
3439 }
3440 #endif
3441 
3442 /*
3443  * Expand environment variable with path name.
3444  * "~/" is also expanded, using $HOME.	For Unix "~user/" is expanded.
3445  * Skips over "\ ", "\~" and "\$".
3446  * If anything fails no expansion is done and dst equals src.
3447  */
3448     void
3449 expand_env(src, dst, dstlen)
3450     char_u	*src;		/* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3451     char_u	*dst;		/* where to put the result */
3452     int		dstlen;		/* maximum length of the result */
3453 {
3454     expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, FALSE, NULL);
3455 }
3456 
3457     void
3458 expand_env_esc(srcp, dst, dstlen, esc, startstr)
3459     char_u	*srcp;		/* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3460     char_u	*dst;		/* where to put the result */
3461     int		dstlen;		/* maximum length of the result */
3462     int		esc;		/* escape spaces in expanded variables */
3463     char_u	*startstr;	/* start again after this (can be NULL) */
3464 {
3465     char_u	*src;
3466     char_u	*tail;
3467     int		c;
3468     char_u	*var;
3469     int		copy_char;
3470     int		mustfree;	/* var was allocated, need to free it later */
3471     int		at_start = TRUE; /* at start of a name */
3472     int		startstr_len = 0;
3473 
3474     if (startstr != NULL)
3475 	startstr_len = STRLEN(startstr);
3476 
3477     src = skipwhite(srcp);
3478     --dstlen;		    /* leave one char space for "\," */
3479     while (*src && dstlen > 0)
3480     {
3481 	copy_char = TRUE;
3482 	if ((*src == '$'
3483 #ifdef VMS
3484 		    && at_start
3485 #endif
3486 	   )
3487 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3488 		|| *src == '%'
3489 #endif
3490 		|| (*src == '~' && at_start))
3491 	{
3492 	    mustfree = FALSE;
3493 
3494 	    /*
3495 	     * The variable name is copied into dst temporarily, because it may
3496 	     * be a string in read-only memory and a NUL needs to be appended.
3497 	     */
3498 	    if (*src != '~')				/* environment var */
3499 	    {
3500 		tail = src + 1;
3501 		var = dst;
3502 		c = dstlen - 1;
3503 
3504 #ifdef UNIX
3505 		/* Unix has ${var-name} type environment vars */
3506 		if (*tail == '{' && !vim_isIDc('{'))
3507 		{
3508 		    tail++;	/* ignore '{' */
3509 		    while (c-- > 0 && *tail && *tail != '}')
3510 			*var++ = *tail++;
3511 		}
3512 		else
3513 #endif
3514 		{
3515 		    while (c-- > 0 && *tail != NUL && ((vim_isIDc(*tail))
3516 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3517 			    || (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3518 #endif
3519 			    ))
3520 		    {
3521 #ifdef OS2		/* env vars only in uppercase */
3522 			*var++ = TOUPPER_LOC(*tail);
3523 			tail++;	    /* toupper() may be a macro! */
3524 #else
3525 			*var++ = *tail++;
3526 #endif
3527 		    }
3528 		}
3529 
3530 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3531 # ifdef UNIX
3532 		if (src[1] == '{' && *tail != '}')
3533 # else
3534 		if (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3535 # endif
3536 		    var = NULL;
3537 		else
3538 		{
3539 # ifdef UNIX
3540 		    if (src[1] == '{')
3541 # else
3542 		    if (*src == '%')
3543 #endif
3544 			++tail;
3545 #endif
3546 		    *var = NUL;
3547 		    var = vim_getenv(dst, &mustfree);
3548 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3549 		}
3550 #endif
3551 	    }
3552 							/* home directory */
3553 	    else if (  src[1] == NUL
3554 		    || vim_ispathsep(src[1])
3555 		    || vim_strchr((char_u *)" ,\t\n", src[1]) != NULL)
3556 	    {
3557 		var = homedir;
3558 		tail = src + 1;
3559 	    }
3560 	    else					/* user directory */
3561 	    {
3562 #if defined(UNIX) || (defined(VMS) && defined(USER_HOME))
3563 		/*
3564 		 * Copy ~user to dst[], so we can put a NUL after it.
3565 		 */
3566 		tail = src;
3567 		var = dst;
3568 		c = dstlen - 1;
3569 		while (	   c-- > 0
3570 			&& *tail
3571 			&& vim_isfilec(*tail)
3572 			&& !vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3573 		    *var++ = *tail++;
3574 		*var = NUL;
3575 # ifdef UNIX
3576 		/*
3577 		 * If the system supports getpwnam(), use it.
3578 		 * Otherwise, or if getpwnam() fails, the shell is used to
3579 		 * expand ~user.  This is slower and may fail if the shell
3580 		 * does not support ~user (old versions of /bin/sh).
3581 		 */
3582 #  if defined(HAVE_GETPWNAM) && defined(HAVE_PWD_H)
3583 		{
3584 		    struct passwd *pw;
3585 
3586 		    pw = getpwnam((char *)dst + 1);
3587 		    if (pw != NULL)
3588 			var = (char_u *)pw->pw_dir;
3589 		    else
3590 			var = NULL;
3591 		}
3592 		if (var == NULL)
3593 #  endif
3594 		{
3595 		    expand_T	xpc;
3596 
3597 		    ExpandInit(&xpc);
3598 		    xpc.xp_context = EXPAND_FILES;
3599 		    var = ExpandOne(&xpc, dst, NULL,
3600 				WILD_ADD_SLASH|WILD_SILENT, WILD_EXPAND_FREE);
3601 		    ExpandCleanup(&xpc);
3602 		    mustfree = TRUE;
3603 		}
3604 
3605 # else	/* !UNIX, thus VMS */
3606 		/*
3607 		 * USER_HOME is a comma-separated list of
3608 		 * directories to search for the user account in.
3609 		 */
3610 		{
3611 		    char_u	test[MAXPATHL], paths[MAXPATHL];
3612 		    char_u	*path, *next_path, *ptr;
3613 		    struct stat	st;
3614 
3615 		    STRCPY(paths, USER_HOME);
3616 		    next_path = paths;
3617 		    while (*next_path)
3618 		    {
3619 			for (path = next_path; *next_path && *next_path != ',';
3620 				next_path++);
3621 			if (*next_path)
3622 			    *next_path++ = NUL;
3623 			STRCPY(test, path);
3624 			STRCAT(test, "/");
3625 			STRCAT(test, dst + 1);
3626 			if (mch_stat(test, &st) == 0)
3627 			{
3628 			    var = alloc(STRLEN(test) + 1);
3629 			    STRCPY(var, test);
3630 			    mustfree = TRUE;
3631 			    break;
3632 			}
3633 		    }
3634 		}
3635 # endif /* UNIX */
3636 #else
3637 		/* cannot expand user's home directory, so don't try */
3638 		var = NULL;
3639 		tail = (char_u *)"";	/* for gcc */
3640 #endif /* UNIX || VMS */
3641 	    }
3642 
3643 #ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
3644 	    /* If 'shellslash' is set change backslashes to forward slashes.
3645 	     * Can't use slash_adjust(), p_ssl may be set temporarily. */
3646 	    if (p_ssl && var != NULL && vim_strchr(var, '\\') != NULL)
3647 	    {
3648 		char_u	*p = vim_strsave(var);
3649 
3650 		if (p != NULL)
3651 		{
3652 		    if (mustfree)
3653 			vim_free(var);
3654 		    var = p;
3655 		    mustfree = TRUE;
3656 		    forward_slash(var);
3657 		}
3658 	    }
3659 #endif
3660 
3661 	    /* If "var" contains white space, escape it with a backslash.
3662 	     * Required for ":e ~/tt" when $HOME includes a space. */
3663 	    if (esc && var != NULL && vim_strpbrk(var, (char_u *)" \t") != NULL)
3664 	    {
3665 		char_u	*p = vim_strsave_escaped(var, (char_u *)" \t");
3666 
3667 		if (p != NULL)
3668 		{
3669 		    if (mustfree)
3670 			vim_free(var);
3671 		    var = p;
3672 		    mustfree = TRUE;
3673 		}
3674 	    }
3675 
3676 	    if (var != NULL && *var != NUL
3677 		    && (STRLEN(var) + STRLEN(tail) + 1 < (unsigned)dstlen))
3678 	    {
3679 		STRCPY(dst, var);
3680 		dstlen -= (int)STRLEN(var);
3681 		c = STRLEN(var);
3682 		/* if var[] ends in a path separator and tail[] starts
3683 		 * with it, skip a character */
3684 		if (*var != NUL && after_pathsep(dst, dst + c)
3685 #if defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME) || defined(AMIGA)
3686 			&& dst[-1] != ':'
3687 #endif
3688 			&& vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3689 		    ++tail;
3690 		dst += c;
3691 		src = tail;
3692 		copy_char = FALSE;
3693 	    }
3694 	    if (mustfree)
3695 		vim_free(var);
3696 	}
3697 
3698 	if (copy_char)	    /* copy at least one char */
3699 	{
3700 	    /*
3701 	     * Recogize the start of a new name, for '~'.
3702 	     */
3703 	    at_start = FALSE;
3704 	    if (src[0] == '\\' && src[1] != NUL)
3705 	    {
3706 		*dst++ = *src++;
3707 		--dstlen;
3708 	    }
3709 	    else if (src[0] == ' ' || src[0] == ',')
3710 		at_start = TRUE;
3711 	    *dst++ = *src++;
3712 	    --dstlen;
3713 
3714 	    if (startstr != NULL && src - startstr_len >= srcp
3715 		    && STRNCMP(src - startstr_len, startstr, startstr_len) == 0)
3716 		at_start = TRUE;
3717 	}
3718     }
3719     *dst = NUL;
3720 }
3721 
3722 /*
3723  * Vim's version of getenv().
3724  * Special handling of $HOME, $VIM and $VIMRUNTIME.
3725  * Also does ACP to 'enc' conversion for Win32.
3726  */
3727     char_u *
3728 vim_getenv(name, mustfree)
3729     char_u	*name;
3730     int		*mustfree;	/* set to TRUE when returned is allocated */
3731 {
3732     char_u	*p;
3733     char_u	*pend;
3734     int		vimruntime;
3735 
3736 #if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3737     /* use "C:/" when $HOME is not set */
3738     if (STRCMP(name, "HOME") == 0)
3739 	return homedir;
3740 #endif
3741 
3742     p = mch_getenv(name);
3743     if (p != NULL && *p == NUL)	    /* empty is the same as not set */
3744 	p = NULL;
3745 
3746     if (p != NULL)
3747     {
3748 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3749 	if (enc_utf8)
3750 	{
3751 	    int	    len;
3752 	    char_u  *pp;
3753 
3754 	    /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8.  Other conversions are
3755 	     * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3756 	    acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3757 	    if (pp != NULL)
3758 	    {
3759 		p = pp;
3760 		*mustfree = TRUE;
3761 	    }
3762 	}
3763 #endif
3764 	return p;
3765     }
3766 
3767     vimruntime = (STRCMP(name, "VIMRUNTIME") == 0);
3768     if (!vimruntime && STRCMP(name, "VIM") != 0)
3769 	return NULL;
3770 
3771     /*
3772      * When expanding $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using $VIM/vim<version> or $VIM.
3773      * Don't do this when default_vimruntime_dir is non-empty.
3774      */
3775     if (vimruntime
3776 #ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3777 	    && *default_vimruntime_dir == NUL
3778 #endif
3779        )
3780     {
3781 	p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
3782 	if (p != NULL && *p == NUL)	    /* empty is the same as not set */
3783 	    p = NULL;
3784 	if (p != NULL)
3785 	{
3786 	    p = vim_version_dir(p);
3787 	    if (p != NULL)
3788 		*mustfree = TRUE;
3789 	    else
3790 		p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
3791 
3792 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3793 	    if (enc_utf8)
3794 	    {
3795 		int	len;
3796 		char_u  *pp;
3797 
3798 		/* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8.  Other conversions
3799 		 * are not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII
3800 		 * characters. */
3801 		acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3802 		if (pp != NULL)
3803 		{
3804 		    if (mustfree)
3805 			vim_free(p);
3806 		    p = pp;
3807 		    *mustfree = TRUE;
3808 		}
3809 	    }
3810 #endif
3811 	}
3812     }
3813 
3814     /*
3815      * When expanding $VIM or $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using:
3816      * - the directory name from 'helpfile' (unless it contains '$')
3817      * - the executable name from argv[0]
3818      */
3819     if (p == NULL)
3820     {
3821 	if (p_hf != NULL && vim_strchr(p_hf, '$') == NULL)
3822 	    p = p_hf;
3823 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3824 	/*
3825 	 * Use the name of the executable, obtained from argv[0].
3826 	 */
3827 	else
3828 	    p = exe_name;
3829 #endif
3830 	if (p != NULL)
3831 	{
3832 	    /* remove the file name */
3833 	    pend = gettail(p);
3834 
3835 	    /* remove "doc/" from 'helpfile', if present */
3836 	    if (p == p_hf)
3837 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"doc");
3838 
3839 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3840 # ifdef MACOS_X
3841 	    /* remove "build/..." from exe_name, if present */
3842 	    if (p == exe_name)
3843 	    {
3844 		char_u	*pend1;
3845 		char_u  *pend2;
3846 
3847 		pend1 = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"Contents/MacOS");
3848 		pend2 = remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend1, (char_u *)".app");
3849 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend2, (char_u *)"build");
3850 		/* When runnig from project builder get rid of the
3851 		 * build/???.app, otherwise keep the ???.app */
3852 		if (pend2 == pend)
3853 		    pend = pend1;
3854 	    }
3855 # endif
3856 	    /* remove "src/" from exe_name, if present */
3857 	    if (p == exe_name)
3858 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"src");
3859 #endif
3860 
3861 	    /* for $VIM, remove "runtime/" or "vim54/", if present */
3862 	    if (!vimruntime)
3863 	    {
3864 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME);
3865 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT);
3866 	    }
3867 
3868 	    /* remove trailing path separator */
3869 #ifndef MACOS_CLASSIC
3870 	    /* With MacOS path (with  colons) the final colon is required */
3871 	    /* to avoid confusion between absoulute and relative path */
3872 	    if (pend > p && after_pathsep(p, pend))
3873 		--pend;
3874 #endif
3875 
3876 	    /* check that the result is a directory name */
3877 	    p = vim_strnsave(p, (int)(pend - p));
3878 
3879 	    if (p != NULL && !mch_isdir(p))
3880 	    {
3881 		vim_free(p);
3882 		p = NULL;
3883 	    }
3884 	    else
3885 	    {
3886 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3887 		/* may add "/vim54" or "/runtime" if it exists */
3888 		if (vimruntime && (pend = vim_version_dir(p)) != NULL)
3889 		{
3890 		    vim_free(p);
3891 		    p = pend;
3892 		}
3893 #endif
3894 		*mustfree = TRUE;
3895 	    }
3896 	}
3897     }
3898 
3899 #ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3900     /* When there is a pathdef.c file we can use default_vim_dir and
3901      * default_vimruntime_dir */
3902     if (p == NULL)
3903     {
3904 	/* Only use default_vimruntime_dir when it is not empty */
3905 	if (vimruntime && *default_vimruntime_dir != NUL)
3906 	{
3907 	    p = default_vimruntime_dir;
3908 	    *mustfree = FALSE;
3909 	}
3910 	else if (*default_vim_dir != NUL)
3911 	{
3912 	    if (vimruntime && (p = vim_version_dir(default_vim_dir)) != NULL)
3913 		*mustfree = TRUE;
3914 	    else
3915 	    {
3916 		p = default_vim_dir;
3917 		*mustfree = FALSE;
3918 	    }
3919 	}
3920     }
3921 #endif
3922 
3923     /*
3924      * Set the environment variable, so that the new value can be found fast
3925      * next time, and others can also use it (e.g. Perl).
3926      */
3927     if (p != NULL)
3928     {
3929 	if (vimruntime)
3930 	{
3931 	    vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIMRUNTIME", p);
3932 	    didset_vimruntime = TRUE;
3933 #ifdef FEAT_GETTEXT
3934 	    {
3935 		char_u	*buf = concat_str(p, (char_u *)"/lang");
3936 
3937 		if (buf != NULL)
3938 		{
3939 		    bindtextdomain(VIMPACKAGE, (char *)buf);
3940 		    vim_free(buf);
3941 		}
3942 	    }
3943 #endif
3944 	}
3945 	else
3946 	{
3947 	    vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIM", p);
3948 	    didset_vim = TRUE;
3949 	}
3950     }
3951     return p;
3952 }
3953 
3954 /*
3955  * Check if the directory "vimdir/<version>" or "vimdir/runtime" exists.
3956  * Return NULL if not, return its name in allocated memory otherwise.
3957  */
3958     static char_u *
3959 vim_version_dir(vimdir)
3960     char_u	*vimdir;
3961 {
3962     char_u	*p;
3963 
3964     if (vimdir == NULL || *vimdir == NUL)
3965 	return NULL;
3966     p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT, TRUE);
3967     if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3968 	return p;
3969     vim_free(p);
3970     p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME, TRUE);
3971     if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3972 	return p;
3973     vim_free(p);
3974     return NULL;
3975 }
3976 
3977 /*
3978  * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "name/", return "pend" minus
3979  * the length of "name/".  Otherwise return "pend".
3980  */
3981     static char_u *
3982 remove_tail(p, pend, name)
3983     char_u	*p;
3984     char_u	*pend;
3985     char_u	*name;
3986 {
3987     int		len = (int)STRLEN(name) + 1;
3988     char_u	*newend = pend - len;
3989 
3990     if (newend >= p
3991 	    && fnamencmp(newend, name, len - 1) == 0
3992 	    && (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend)))
3993 	return newend;
3994     return pend;
3995 }
3996 
3997 #if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X)
3998 /*
3999  * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "???.ext/", return "pend"
4000  * minus the length of "???.ext/".  Otherwise return "pend".
4001  */
4002     static char_u *
4003 remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend, ext)
4004     char_u	*p;
4005     char_u	*pend;
4006     char_u	*ext;
4007 {
4008     int		len = (int)STRLEN(ext) + 1;
4009     char_u	*newend = pend - len;
4010 
4011     if (newend >= p && fnamencmp(newend, ext, len - 1) == 0)
4012 	while (newend > p && !after_pathsep(p, newend))
4013 	    mb_ptr_back(p, newend);
4014     if (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend))
4015 	return newend;
4016     return pend;
4017 }
4018 #endif
4019 
4020 /*
4021  * Call expand_env() and store the result in an allocated string.
4022  * This is not very memory efficient, this expects the result to be freed
4023  * again soon.
4024  */
4025     char_u *
4026 expand_env_save(src)
4027     char_u	*src;
4028 {
4029     char_u	*p;
4030 
4031     p = alloc(MAXPATHL);
4032     if (p != NULL)
4033 	expand_env(src, p, MAXPATHL);
4034     return p;
4035 }
4036 
4037 /*
4038  * Our portable version of setenv.
4039  */
4040     void
4041 vim_setenv(name, val)
4042     char_u	*name;
4043     char_u	*val;
4044 {
4045 #ifdef HAVE_SETENV
4046     mch_setenv((char *)name, (char *)val, 1);
4047 #else
4048     char_u	*envbuf;
4049 
4050     /*
4051      * Putenv does not copy the string, it has to remain
4052      * valid.  The allocated memory will never be freed.
4053      */
4054     envbuf = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(name) + STRLEN(val) + 2));
4055     if (envbuf != NULL)
4056     {
4057 	sprintf((char *)envbuf, "%s=%s", name, val);
4058 	putenv((char *)envbuf);
4059     }
4060 #endif
4061 }
4062 
4063 #if defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO)
4064 /*
4065  * Function given to ExpandGeneric() to obtain an environment variable name.
4066  */
4067 /*ARGSUSED*/
4068     char_u *
4069 get_env_name(xp, idx)
4070     expand_T	*xp;
4071     int		idx;
4072 {
4073 # if defined(AMIGA) || defined(__MRC__) || defined(__SC__)
4074     /*
4075      * No environ[] on the Amiga and on the Mac (using MPW).
4076      */
4077     return NULL;
4078 # else
4079 # ifndef __WIN32__
4080     /* Borland C++ 5.2 has this in a header file. */
4081     extern char		**environ;
4082 # endif
4083 # define ENVNAMELEN 100
4084     static char_u	name[ENVNAMELEN];
4085     char_u		*str;
4086     int			n;
4087 
4088     str = (char_u *)environ[idx];
4089     if (str == NULL)
4090 	return NULL;
4091 
4092     for (n = 0; n < ENVNAMELEN - 1; ++n)
4093     {
4094 	if (str[n] == '=' || str[n] == NUL)
4095 	    break;
4096 	name[n] = str[n];
4097     }
4098     name[n] = NUL;
4099     return name;
4100 # endif
4101 }
4102 #endif
4103 
4104 /*
4105  * Replace home directory by "~" in each space or comma separated file name in
4106  * 'src'.
4107  * If anything fails (except when out of space) dst equals src.
4108  */
4109     void
4110 home_replace(buf, src, dst, dstlen, one)
4111     buf_T	*buf;	/* when not NULL, check for help files */
4112     char_u	*src;	/* input file name */
4113     char_u	*dst;	/* where to put the result */
4114     int		dstlen;	/* maximum length of the result */
4115     int		one;	/* if TRUE, only replace one file name, include
4116 			   spaces and commas in the file name. */
4117 {
4118     size_t	dirlen = 0, envlen = 0;
4119     size_t	len;
4120     char_u	*homedir_env;
4121     char_u	*p;
4122 
4123     if (src == NULL)
4124     {
4125 	*dst = NUL;
4126 	return;
4127     }
4128 
4129     /*
4130      * If the file is a help file, remove the path completely.
4131      */
4132     if (buf != NULL && buf->b_help)
4133     {
4134 	STRCPY(dst, gettail(src));
4135 	return;
4136     }
4137 
4138     /*
4139      * We check both the value of the $HOME environment variable and the
4140      * "real" home directory.
4141      */
4142     if (homedir != NULL)
4143 	dirlen = STRLEN(homedir);
4144 
4145 #ifdef VMS
4146     homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
4147 #else
4148     homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
4149 #endif
4150 
4151     if (homedir_env != NULL && *homedir_env == NUL)
4152 	homedir_env = NULL;
4153     if (homedir_env != NULL)
4154 	envlen = STRLEN(homedir_env);
4155 
4156     if (!one)
4157 	src = skipwhite(src);
4158     while (*src && dstlen > 0)
4159     {
4160 	/*
4161 	 * Here we are at the beginning of a file name.
4162 	 * First, check to see if the beginning of the file name matches
4163 	 * $HOME or the "real" home directory. Check that there is a '/'
4164 	 * after the match (so that if e.g. the file is "/home/pieter/bla",
4165 	 * and the home directory is "/home/piet", the file does not end up
4166 	 * as "~er/bla" (which would seem to indicate the file "bla" in user
4167 	 * er's home directory)).
4168 	 */
4169 	p = homedir;
4170 	len = dirlen;
4171 	for (;;)
4172 	{
4173 	    if (   len
4174 		&& fnamencmp(src, p, len) == 0
4175 		&& (vim_ispathsep(src[len])
4176 		    || (!one && (src[len] == ',' || src[len] == ' '))
4177 		    || src[len] == NUL))
4178 	    {
4179 		src += len;
4180 		if (--dstlen > 0)
4181 		    *dst++ = '~';
4182 
4183 		/*
4184 		 * If it's just the home directory, add  "/".
4185 		 */
4186 		if (!vim_ispathsep(src[0]) && --dstlen > 0)
4187 		    *dst++ = '/';
4188 		break;
4189 	    }
4190 	    if (p == homedir_env)
4191 		break;
4192 	    p = homedir_env;
4193 	    len = envlen;
4194 	}
4195 
4196 	/* if (!one) skip to separator: space or comma */
4197 	while (*src && (one || (*src != ',' && *src != ' ')) && --dstlen > 0)
4198 	    *dst++ = *src++;
4199 	/* skip separator */
4200 	while ((*src == ' ' || *src == ',') && --dstlen > 0)
4201 	    *dst++ = *src++;
4202     }
4203     /* if (dstlen == 0) out of space, what to do??? */
4204 
4205     *dst = NUL;
4206 }
4207 
4208 /*
4209  * Like home_replace, store the replaced string in allocated memory.
4210  * When something fails, NULL is returned.
4211  */
4212     char_u  *
4213 home_replace_save(buf, src)
4214     buf_T	*buf;	/* when not NULL, check for help files */
4215     char_u	*src;	/* input file name */
4216 {
4217     char_u	*dst;
4218     unsigned	len;
4219 
4220     len = 3;			/* space for "~/" and trailing NUL */
4221     if (src != NULL)		/* just in case */
4222 	len += (unsigned)STRLEN(src);
4223     dst = alloc(len);
4224     if (dst != NULL)
4225 	home_replace(buf, src, dst, len, TRUE);
4226     return dst;
4227 }
4228 
4229 /*
4230  * Compare two file names and return:
4231  * FPC_SAME   if they both exist and are the same file.
4232  * FPC_SAMEX  if they both don't exist and have the same file name.
4233  * FPC_DIFF   if they both exist and are different files.
4234  * FPC_NOTX   if they both don't exist.
4235  * FPC_DIFFX  if one of them doesn't exist.
4236  * For the first name environment variables are expanded
4237  */
4238     int
4239 fullpathcmp(s1, s2, checkname)
4240     char_u *s1, *s2;
4241     int	    checkname;		/* when both don't exist, check file names */
4242 {
4243 #ifdef UNIX
4244     char_u	    exp1[MAXPATHL];
4245     char_u	    full1[MAXPATHL];
4246     char_u	    full2[MAXPATHL];
4247     struct stat	    st1, st2;
4248     int		    r1, r2;
4249 
4250     expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4251     r1 = mch_stat((char *)exp1, &st1);
4252     r2 = mch_stat((char *)s2, &st2);
4253     if (r1 != 0 && r2 != 0)
4254     {
4255 	/* if mch_stat() doesn't work, may compare the names */
4256 	if (checkname)
4257 	{
4258 	    if (fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4259 		return FPC_SAMEX;
4260 	    r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4261 	    r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4262 	    if (r1 == OK && r2 == OK && fnamecmp(full1, full2) == 0)
4263 		return FPC_SAMEX;
4264 	}
4265 	return FPC_NOTX;
4266     }
4267     if (r1 != 0 || r2 != 0)
4268 	return FPC_DIFFX;
4269     if (st1.st_dev == st2.st_dev && st1.st_ino == st2.st_ino)
4270 	return FPC_SAME;
4271     return FPC_DIFF;
4272 #else
4273     char_u  *exp1;		/* expanded s1 */
4274     char_u  *full1;		/* full path of s1 */
4275     char_u  *full2;		/* full path of s2 */
4276     int	    retval = FPC_DIFF;
4277     int	    r1, r2;
4278 
4279     /* allocate one buffer to store three paths (alloc()/free() is slow!) */
4280     if ((exp1 = alloc(MAXPATHL * 3)) != NULL)
4281     {
4282 	full1 = exp1 + MAXPATHL;
4283 	full2 = full1 + MAXPATHL;
4284 
4285 	expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4286 	r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4287 	r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4288 
4289 	/* If vim_FullName() fails, the file probably doesn't exist. */
4290 	if (r1 != OK && r2 != OK)
4291 	{
4292 	    if (checkname && fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4293 		retval = FPC_SAMEX;
4294 	    else
4295 		retval = FPC_NOTX;
4296 	}
4297 	else if (r1 != OK || r2 != OK)
4298 	    retval = FPC_DIFFX;
4299 	else if (fnamecmp(full1, full2))
4300 	    retval = FPC_DIFF;
4301 	else
4302 	    retval = FPC_SAME;
4303 	vim_free(exp1);
4304     }
4305     return retval;
4306 #endif
4307 }
4308 
4309 /*
4310  * Get the tail of a path: the file name.
4311  * Fail safe: never returns NULL.
4312  */
4313     char_u *
4314 gettail(fname)
4315     char_u *fname;
4316 {
4317     char_u  *p1, *p2;
4318 
4319     if (fname == NULL)
4320 	return (char_u *)"";
4321     for (p1 = p2 = fname; *p2; )	/* find last part of path */
4322     {
4323 	if (vim_ispathsep(*p2))
4324 	    p1 = p2 + 1;
4325 	mb_ptr_adv(p2);
4326     }
4327     return p1;
4328 }
4329 
4330 /*
4331  * Get pointer to tail of "fname", including path separators.  Putting a NUL
4332  * here leaves the directory name.  Takes care of "c:/" and "//".
4333  * Always returns a valid pointer.
4334  */
4335     char_u *
4336 gettail_sep(fname)
4337     char_u	*fname;
4338 {
4339     char_u	*p;
4340     char_u	*t;
4341 
4342     p = get_past_head(fname);	/* don't remove the '/' from "c:/file" */
4343     t = gettail(fname);
4344     while (t > p && after_pathsep(fname, t))
4345 	--t;
4346 #ifdef VMS
4347     /* path separator is part of the path */
4348     ++t;
4349 #endif
4350     return t;
4351 }
4352 
4353 /*
4354  * get the next path component (just after the next path separator).
4355  */
4356     char_u *
4357 getnextcomp(fname)
4358     char_u *fname;
4359 {
4360     while (*fname && !vim_ispathsep(*fname))
4361 	mb_ptr_adv(fname);
4362     if (*fname)
4363 	++fname;
4364     return fname;
4365 }
4366 
4367 /*
4368  * Get a pointer to one character past the head of a path name.
4369  * Unix: after "/"; DOS: after "c:\"; Amiga: after "disk:/"; Mac: no head.
4370  * If there is no head, path is returned.
4371  */
4372     char_u *
4373 get_past_head(path)
4374     char_u  *path;
4375 {
4376     char_u  *retval;
4377 
4378 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
4379     /* may skip "c:" */
4380     if (isalpha(path[0]) && path[1] == ':')
4381 	retval = path + 2;
4382     else
4383 	retval = path;
4384 #else
4385 # if defined(AMIGA)
4386     /* may skip "label:" */
4387     retval = vim_strchr(path, ':');
4388     if (retval == NULL)
4389 	retval = path;
4390 # else	/* Unix */
4391     retval = path;
4392 # endif
4393 #endif
4394 
4395     while (vim_ispathsep(*retval))
4396 	++retval;
4397 
4398     return retval;
4399 }
4400 
4401 /*
4402  * return TRUE if 'c' is a path separator.
4403  */
4404     int
4405 vim_ispathsep(c)
4406     int c;
4407 {
4408 #ifdef RISCOS
4409     return (c == '.' || c == ':');
4410 #else
4411 # ifdef UNIX
4412     return (c == '/');	    /* UNIX has ':' inside file names */
4413 # else
4414 #  ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
4415     return (c == ':' || c == '/' || c == '\\');
4416 #  else
4417 #   ifdef VMS
4418     /* server"user passwd"::device:[full.path.name]fname.extension;version" */
4419     return (c == ':' || c == '[' || c == ']' || c == '/'
4420 	    || c == '<' || c == '>' || c == '"' );
4421 #   else
4422 #    ifdef COLON_AS_PATHSEP
4423     return (c == ':');
4424 #    else		/* Amiga */
4425     return (c == ':' || c == '/');
4426 #    endif
4427 #   endif /* VMS */
4428 #  endif
4429 # endif
4430 #endif /* RISC OS */
4431 }
4432 
4433 #if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH) || defined(PROTO)
4434 /*
4435  * return TRUE if 'c' is a path list separator.
4436  */
4437     int
4438 vim_ispathlistsep(c)
4439     int c;
4440 {
4441 #ifdef UNIX
4442     return (c == ':');
4443 #else
4444     return (c == ';');	/* might not be rigth for every system... */
4445 #endif
4446 }
4447 #endif
4448 
4449 /*
4450  * Return TRUE if the directory of "fname" exists, FALSE otherwise.
4451  * Also returns TRUE if there is no directory name.
4452  * "fname" must be writable!.
4453  */
4454     int
4455 dir_of_file_exists(fname)
4456     char_u	*fname;
4457 {
4458     char_u	*p;
4459     int		c;
4460     int		retval;
4461 
4462     p = gettail_sep(fname);
4463     if (p == fname)
4464 	return TRUE;
4465     c = *p;
4466     *p = NUL;
4467     retval = mch_isdir(fname);
4468     *p = c;
4469     return retval;
4470 }
4471 
4472 #if (defined(CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME) && defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME)) \
4473 	|| defined(PROTO)
4474 /*
4475  * Versions of fnamecmp() and fnamencmp() that handle '/' and '\' equally.
4476  */
4477     int
4478 vim_fnamecmp(x, y)
4479     char_u	*x, *y;
4480 {
4481     return vim_fnamencmp(x, y, MAXPATHL);
4482 }
4483 
4484     int
4485 vim_fnamencmp(x, y, len)
4486     char_u	*x, *y;
4487     size_t	len;
4488 {
4489     while (len > 0 && *x && *y)
4490     {
4491 	if (TOLOWER_LOC(*x) != TOLOWER_LOC(*y)
4492 		&& !(*x == '/' && *y == '\\')
4493 		&& !(*x == '\\' && *y == '/'))
4494 	    break;
4495 	++x;
4496 	++y;
4497 	--len;
4498     }
4499     if (len == 0)
4500 	return 0;
4501     return (*x - *y);
4502 }
4503 #endif
4504 
4505 /*
4506  * Concatenate file names fname1 and fname2 into allocated memory.
4507  * Only add a '/' or '\\' when 'sep' is TRUE and it is neccesary.
4508  */
4509     char_u  *
4510 concat_fnames(fname1, fname2, sep)
4511     char_u  *fname1;
4512     char_u  *fname2;
4513     int	    sep;
4514 {
4515     char_u  *dest;
4516 
4517     dest = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(fname1) + STRLEN(fname2) + 3));
4518     if (dest != NULL)
4519     {
4520 	STRCPY(dest, fname1);
4521 	if (sep)
4522 	    add_pathsep(dest);
4523 	STRCAT(dest, fname2);
4524     }
4525     return dest;
4526 }
4527 
4528 #if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(FEAT_GETTEXT) || defined(PROTO)
4529 /*
4530  * Concatenate two strings and return the result in allocated memory.
4531  * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4532  */
4533     char_u  *
4534 concat_str(str1, str2)
4535     char_u  *str1;
4536     char_u  *str2;
4537 {
4538     char_u  *dest;
4539     size_t  l = STRLEN(str1);
4540 
4541     dest = alloc((unsigned)(l + STRLEN(str2) + 1L));
4542     if (dest != NULL)
4543     {
4544 	STRCPY(dest, str1);
4545 	STRCPY(dest + l, str2);
4546     }
4547     return dest;
4548 }
4549 #endif
4550 
4551 /*
4552  * Add a path separator to a file name, unless it already ends in a path
4553  * separator.
4554  */
4555     void
4556 add_pathsep(p)
4557     char_u	*p;
4558 {
4559     if (*p != NUL && !after_pathsep(p, p + STRLEN(p)))
4560 	STRCAT(p, PATHSEPSTR);
4561 }
4562 
4563 /*
4564  * FullName_save - Make an allocated copy of a full file name.
4565  * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4566  */
4567     char_u  *
4568 FullName_save(fname, force)
4569     char_u	*fname;
4570     int		force;	    /* force expansion, even when it already looks
4571 			       like a full path name */
4572 {
4573     char_u	*buf;
4574     char_u	*new_fname = NULL;
4575 
4576     if (fname == NULL)
4577 	return NULL;
4578 
4579     buf = alloc((unsigned)MAXPATHL);
4580     if (buf != NULL)
4581     {
4582 	if (vim_FullName(fname, buf, MAXPATHL, force) != FAIL)
4583 	    new_fname = vim_strsave(buf);
4584 	else
4585 	    new_fname = vim_strsave(fname);
4586 	vim_free(buf);
4587     }
4588     return new_fname;
4589 }
4590 
4591 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SYN_HL)
4592 
4593 static char_u	*skip_string __ARGS((char_u *p));
4594 
4595 /*
4596  * Find the start of a comment, not knowing if we are in a comment right now.
4597  * Search starts at w_cursor.lnum and goes backwards.
4598  */
4599     pos_T *
4600 find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
4601     int		ind_maxcomment;
4602 {
4603     pos_T	*pos;
4604     char_u	*line;
4605     char_u	*p;
4606 
4607     if ((pos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '*', FM_BACKWARD, ind_maxcomment)) == NULL)
4608 	return NULL;
4609 
4610     /*
4611      * Check if the comment start we found is inside a string.
4612      */
4613     line = ml_get(pos->lnum);
4614     for (p = line; *p && (unsigned)(p - line) < pos->col; ++p)
4615 	p = skip_string(p);
4616     if ((unsigned)(p - line) > pos->col)
4617 	return NULL;
4618     return pos;
4619 }
4620 
4621 /*
4622  * Skip to the end of a "string" and a 'c' character.
4623  * If there is no string or character, return argument unmodified.
4624  */
4625     static char_u *
4626 skip_string(p)
4627     char_u  *p;
4628 {
4629     int	    i;
4630 
4631     /*
4632      * We loop, because strings may be concatenated: "date""time".
4633      */
4634     for ( ; ; ++p)
4635     {
4636 	if (p[0] == '\'')		    /* 'c' or '\n' or '\000' */
4637 	{
4638 	    if (!p[1])			    /* ' at end of line */
4639 		break;
4640 	    i = 2;
4641 	    if (p[1] == '\\')		    /* '\n' or '\000' */
4642 	    {
4643 		++i;
4644 		while (vim_isdigit(p[i - 1]))   /* '\000' */
4645 		    ++i;
4646 	    }
4647 	    if (p[i] == '\'')		    /* check for trailing ' */
4648 	    {
4649 		p += i;
4650 		continue;
4651 	    }
4652 	}
4653 	else if (p[0] == '"')		    /* start of string */
4654 	{
4655 	    for (++p; p[0]; ++p)
4656 	    {
4657 		if (p[0] == '\\' && p[1] != NUL)
4658 		    ++p;
4659 		else if (p[0] == '"')	    /* end of string */
4660 		    break;
4661 	    }
4662 	    if (p[0] == '"')
4663 		continue;
4664 	}
4665 	break;				    /* no string found */
4666     }
4667     if (!*p)
4668 	--p;				    /* backup from NUL */
4669     return p;
4670 }
4671 #endif /* FEAT_CINDENT || FEAT_SYN_HL */
4672 
4673 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(PROTO)
4674 
4675 /*
4676  * Do C or expression indenting on the current line.
4677  */
4678     void
4679 do_c_expr_indent()
4680 {
4681 # ifdef FEAT_EVAL
4682     if (*curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL)
4683 	fixthisline(get_expr_indent);
4684     else
4685 # endif
4686 	fixthisline(get_c_indent);
4687 }
4688 
4689 /*
4690  * Functions for C-indenting.
4691  * Most of this originally comes from Eric Fischer.
4692  */
4693 /*
4694  * Below "XXX" means that this function may unlock the current line.
4695  */
4696 
4697 static char_u	*cin_skipcomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4698 static int	cin_nocode __ARGS((char_u *));
4699 static pos_T	*find_line_comment __ARGS((void));
4700 static int	cin_islabel_skip __ARGS((char_u **));
4701 static int	cin_isdefault __ARGS((char_u *));
4702 static char_u	*after_label __ARGS((char_u *l));
4703 static int	get_indent_nolabel __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4704 static int	skip_label __ARGS((linenr_T, char_u **pp, int ind_maxcomment));
4705 static int	cin_first_id_amount __ARGS((void));
4706 static int	cin_get_equal_amount __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4707 static int	cin_ispreproc __ARGS((char_u *));
4708 static int	cin_ispreproc_cont __ARGS((char_u **pp, linenr_T *lnump));
4709 static int	cin_iscomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4710 static int	cin_islinecomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4711 static int	cin_isterminated __ARGS((char_u *, int, int));
4712 static int	cin_isinit __ARGS((void));
4713 static int	cin_isfuncdecl __ARGS((char_u **, linenr_T));
4714 static int	cin_isif __ARGS((char_u *));
4715 static int	cin_iselse __ARGS((char_u *));
4716 static int	cin_isdo __ARGS((char_u *));
4717 static int	cin_iswhileofdo __ARGS((char_u *, linenr_T, int));
4718 static int	cin_isbreak __ARGS((char_u *));
4719 static int	cin_is_cpp_baseclass __ARGS((char_u *line, colnr_T *col));
4720 static int	cin_ends_in __ARGS((char_u *, char_u *, char_u *));
4721 static int	cin_skip2pos __ARGS((pos_T *trypos));
4722 static pos_T	*find_start_brace __ARGS((int));
4723 static pos_T	*find_match_paren __ARGS((int, int));
4724 static int	corr_ind_maxparen __ARGS((int ind_maxparen, pos_T *startpos));
4725 static int	find_last_paren __ARGS((char_u *l, int start, int end));
4726 static int	find_match __ARGS((int lookfor, linenr_T ourscope, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment));
4727 
4728 /*
4729  * Skip over white space and C comments within the line.
4730  */
4731     static char_u *
4732 cin_skipcomment(s)
4733     char_u	*s;
4734 {
4735     while (*s)
4736     {
4737 	s = skipwhite(s);
4738 	if (*s != '/')
4739 	    break;
4740 	++s;
4741 	if (*s == '/')		/* slash-slash comment continues till eol */
4742 	{
4743 	    s += STRLEN(s);
4744 	    break;
4745 	}
4746 	if (*s != '*')
4747 	    break;
4748 	for (++s; *s; ++s)	/* skip slash-star comment */
4749 	    if (s[0] == '*' && s[1] == '/')
4750 	    {
4751 		s += 2;
4752 		break;
4753 	    }
4754     }
4755     return s;
4756 }
4757 
4758 /*
4759  * Return TRUE if there there is no code at *s.  White space and comments are
4760  * not considered code.
4761  */
4762     static int
4763 cin_nocode(s)
4764     char_u	*s;
4765 {
4766     return *cin_skipcomment(s) == NUL;
4767 }
4768 
4769 /*
4770  * Check previous lines for a "//" line comment, skipping over blank lines.
4771  */
4772     static pos_T *
4773 find_line_comment() /* XXX */
4774 {
4775     static pos_T pos;
4776     char_u	 *line;
4777     char_u	 *p;
4778 
4779     pos = curwin->w_cursor;
4780     while (--pos.lnum > 0)
4781     {
4782 	line = ml_get(pos.lnum);
4783 	p = skipwhite(line);
4784 	if (cin_islinecomment(p))
4785 	{
4786 	    pos.col = (int)(p - line);
4787 	    return &pos;
4788 	}
4789 	if (*p != NUL)
4790 	    break;
4791     }
4792     return NULL;
4793 }
4794 
4795 /*
4796  * Check if string matches "label:"; move to character after ':' if true.
4797  */
4798     static int
4799 cin_islabel_skip(s)
4800     char_u	**s;
4801 {
4802     if (!vim_isIDc(**s))	    /* need at least one ID character */
4803 	return FALSE;
4804 
4805     while (vim_isIDc(**s))
4806 	(*s)++;
4807 
4808     *s = cin_skipcomment(*s);
4809 
4810     /* "::" is not a label, it's C++ */
4811     return (**s == ':' && *++*s != ':');
4812 }
4813 
4814 /*
4815  * Recognize a label: "label:".
4816  * Note: curwin->w_cursor must be where we are looking for the label.
4817  */
4818     int
4819 cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)		/* XXX */
4820     int		ind_maxcomment;
4821 {
4822     char_u	*s;
4823 
4824     s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4825 
4826     /*
4827      * Exclude "default" from labels, since it should be indented
4828      * like a switch label.  Same for C++ scope declarations.
4829      */
4830     if (cin_isdefault(s))
4831 	return FALSE;
4832     if (cin_isscopedecl(s))
4833 	return FALSE;
4834 
4835     if (cin_islabel_skip(&s))
4836     {
4837 	/*
4838 	 * Only accept a label if the previous line is terminated or is a case
4839 	 * label.
4840 	 */
4841 	pos_T	cursor_save;
4842 	pos_T	*trypos;
4843 	char_u	*line;
4844 
4845 	cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
4846 	while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
4847 	{
4848 	    --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
4849 
4850 	    /*
4851 	     * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
4852 	     */
4853 	    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
4854 	    if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
4855 		curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
4856 
4857 	    line = ml_get_curline();
4858 	    if (cin_ispreproc(line))	/* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
4859 		continue;
4860 	    if (*(line = cin_skipcomment(line)) == NUL)
4861 		continue;
4862 
4863 	    curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4864 	    if (cin_isterminated(line, TRUE, FALSE)
4865 		    || cin_isscopedecl(line)
4866 		    || cin_iscase(line)
4867 		    || (cin_islabel_skip(&line) && cin_nocode(line)))
4868 		return TRUE;
4869 	    return FALSE;
4870 	}
4871 	curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4872 	return TRUE;		/* label at start of file??? */
4873     }
4874     return FALSE;
4875 }
4876 
4877 /*
4878  * Recognize structure initialization and enumerations.
4879  * Q&D-Implementation:
4880  * check for "=" at end or "[typedef] enum" at beginning of line.
4881  */
4882     static int
4883 cin_isinit(void)
4884 {
4885     char_u	*s;
4886 
4887     s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4888 
4889     if (STRNCMP(s, "typedef", 7) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[7]))
4890 	s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7);
4891 
4892     if (STRNCMP(s, "enum", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4893 	return TRUE;
4894 
4895     if (cin_ends_in(s, (char_u *)"=", (char_u *)"{"))
4896 	return TRUE;
4897 
4898     return FALSE;
4899 }
4900 
4901 /*
4902  * Recognize a switch label: "case .*:" or "default:".
4903  */
4904      int
4905 cin_iscase(s)
4906     char_u *s;
4907 {
4908     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4909     if (STRNCMP(s, "case", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4910     {
4911 	for (s += 4; *s; ++s)
4912 	{
4913 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4914 	    if (*s == ':')
4915 	    {
4916 		if (s[1] == ':')	/* skip over "::" for C++ */
4917 		    ++s;
4918 		else
4919 		    return TRUE;
4920 	    }
4921 	    if (*s == '\'' && s[1] && s[2] == '\'')
4922 		s += 2;			/* skip over '.' */
4923 	    else if (*s == '/' && (s[1] == '*' || s[1] == '/'))
4924 		return FALSE;		/* stop at comment */
4925 	    else if (*s == '"')
4926 		return FALSE;		/* stop at string */
4927 	}
4928 	return FALSE;
4929     }
4930 
4931     if (cin_isdefault(s))
4932 	return TRUE;
4933     return FALSE;
4934 }
4935 
4936 /*
4937  * Recognize a "default" switch label.
4938  */
4939     static int
4940 cin_isdefault(s)
4941     char_u  *s;
4942 {
4943     return (STRNCMP(s, "default", 7) == 0
4944 	    && *(s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7)) == ':'
4945 	    && s[1] != ':');
4946 }
4947 
4948 /*
4949  * Recognize a "public/private/proctected" scope declaration label.
4950  */
4951     int
4952 cin_isscopedecl(s)
4953     char_u	*s;
4954 {
4955     int		i;
4956 
4957     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4958     if (STRNCMP(s, "public", 6) == 0)
4959 	i = 6;
4960     else if (STRNCMP(s, "protected", 9) == 0)
4961 	i = 9;
4962     else if (STRNCMP(s, "private", 7) == 0)
4963 	i = 7;
4964     else
4965 	return FALSE;
4966     return (*(s = cin_skipcomment(s + i)) == ':' && s[1] != ':');
4967 }
4968 
4969 /*
4970  * Return a pointer to the first non-empty non-comment character after a ':'.
4971  * Return NULL if not found.
4972  *	  case 234:    a = b;
4973  *		       ^
4974  */
4975     static char_u *
4976 after_label(l)
4977     char_u  *l;
4978 {
4979     for ( ; *l; ++l)
4980     {
4981 	if (*l == ':')
4982 	{
4983 	    if (l[1] == ':')	    /* skip over "::" for C++ */
4984 		++l;
4985 	    else if (!cin_iscase(l + 1))
4986 		break;
4987 	}
4988 	else if (*l == '\'' && l[1] && l[2] == '\'')
4989 	    l += 2;		    /* skip over 'x' */
4990     }
4991     if (*l == NUL)
4992 	return NULL;
4993     l = cin_skipcomment(l + 1);
4994     if (*l == NUL)
4995 	return NULL;
4996     return l;
4997 }
4998 
4999 /*
5000  * Get indent of line "lnum", skipping a label.
5001  * Return 0 if there is nothing after the label.
5002  */
5003     static int
5004 get_indent_nolabel(lnum)		/* XXX */
5005     linenr_T	lnum;
5006 {
5007     char_u	*l;
5008     pos_T	fp;
5009     colnr_T	col;
5010     char_u	*p;
5011 
5012     l = ml_get(lnum);
5013     p = after_label(l);
5014     if (p == NULL)
5015 	return 0;
5016 
5017     fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - l);
5018     fp.lnum = lnum;
5019     getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5020     return (int)col;
5021 }
5022 
5023 /*
5024  * Find indent for line "lnum", ignoring any case or jump label.
5025  * Also return a pointer to the text (after the label).
5026  *   label:	if (asdf && asdfasdf)
5027  *		^
5028  */
5029     static int
5030 skip_label(lnum, pp, ind_maxcomment)
5031     linenr_T	lnum;
5032     char_u	**pp;
5033     int		ind_maxcomment;
5034 {
5035     char_u	*l;
5036     int		amount;
5037     pos_T	cursor_save;
5038 
5039     cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5040     curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5041     l = ml_get_curline();
5042 				    /* XXX */
5043     if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l) || cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
5044     {
5045 	amount = get_indent_nolabel(lnum);
5046 	l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
5047 	if (l == NULL)		/* just in case */
5048 	    l = ml_get_curline();
5049     }
5050     else
5051     {
5052 	amount = get_indent();
5053 	l = ml_get_curline();
5054     }
5055     *pp = l;
5056 
5057     curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5058     return amount;
5059 }
5060 
5061 /*
5062  * Return the indent of the first variable name after a type in a declaration.
5063  *  int	    a,			indent of "a"
5064  *  static struct foo    b,	indent of "b"
5065  *  enum bla    c,		indent of "c"
5066  * Returns zero when it doesn't look like a declaration.
5067  */
5068     static int
5069 cin_first_id_amount()
5070 {
5071     char_u	*line, *p, *s;
5072     int		len;
5073     pos_T	fp;
5074     colnr_T	col;
5075 
5076     line = ml_get_curline();
5077     p = skipwhite(line);
5078     len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
5079     if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "static", 6) == 0)
5080     {
5081 	p = skipwhite(p + 6);
5082 	len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
5083     }
5084     if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "struct", 6) == 0)
5085 	p = skipwhite(p + 6);
5086     else if (len == 4 && STRNCMP(p, "enum", 4) == 0)
5087 	p = skipwhite(p + 4);
5088     else if ((len == 8 && STRNCMP(p, "unsigned", 8) == 0)
5089 	    || (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "signed", 6) == 0))
5090     {
5091 	s = skipwhite(p + len);
5092 	if ((STRNCMP(s, "int", 3) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[3]))
5093 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "long", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4]))
5094 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "short", 5) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[5]))
5095 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "char", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4])))
5096 	    p = s;
5097     }
5098     for (len = 0; vim_isIDc(p[len]); ++len)
5099 	;
5100     if (len == 0 || !vim_iswhite(p[len]) || cin_nocode(p))
5101 	return 0;
5102 
5103     p = skipwhite(p + len);
5104     fp.lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5105     fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - line);
5106     getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5107     return (int)col;
5108 }
5109 
5110 /*
5111  * Return the indent of the first non-blank after an equal sign.
5112  *       char *foo = "here";
5113  * Return zero if no (useful) equal sign found.
5114  * Return -1 if the line above "lnum" ends in a backslash.
5115  *      foo = "asdf\
5116  *	       asdf\
5117  *	       here";
5118  */
5119     static int
5120 cin_get_equal_amount(lnum)
5121     linenr_T	lnum;
5122 {
5123     char_u	*line;
5124     char_u	*s;
5125     colnr_T	col;
5126     pos_T	fp;
5127 
5128     if (lnum > 1)
5129     {
5130 	line = ml_get(lnum - 1);
5131 	if (*line != NUL && line[STRLEN(line) - 1] == '\\')
5132 	    return -1;
5133     }
5134 
5135     line = s = ml_get(lnum);
5136     while (*s != NUL && vim_strchr((char_u *)"=;{}\"'", *s) == NULL)
5137     {
5138 	if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
5139 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5140 	else
5141 	    ++s;
5142     }
5143     if (*s != '=')
5144 	return 0;
5145 
5146     s = skipwhite(s + 1);
5147     if (cin_nocode(s))
5148 	return 0;
5149 
5150     if (*s == '"')	/* nice alignment for continued strings */
5151 	++s;
5152 
5153     fp.lnum = lnum;
5154     fp.col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5155     getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5156     return (int)col;
5157 }
5158 
5159 /*
5160  * Recognize a preprocessor statement: Any line that starts with '#'.
5161  */
5162     static int
5163 cin_ispreproc(s)
5164     char_u *s;
5165 {
5166     s = skipwhite(s);
5167     if (*s == '#')
5168 	return TRUE;
5169     return FALSE;
5170 }
5171 
5172 /*
5173  * Return TRUE if line "*pp" at "*lnump" is a preprocessor statement or a
5174  * continuation line of a preprocessor statement.  Decrease "*lnump" to the
5175  * start and return the line in "*pp".
5176  */
5177     static int
5178 cin_ispreproc_cont(pp, lnump)
5179     char_u	**pp;
5180     linenr_T	*lnump;
5181 {
5182     char_u	*line = *pp;
5183     linenr_T	lnum = *lnump;
5184     int		retval = FALSE;
5185 
5186     for (;;)
5187     {
5188 	if (cin_ispreproc(line))
5189 	{
5190 	    retval = TRUE;
5191 	    *lnump = lnum;
5192 	    break;
5193 	}
5194 	if (lnum == 1)
5195 	    break;
5196 	line = ml_get(--lnum);
5197 	if (*line == NUL || line[STRLEN(line) - 1] != '\\')
5198 	    break;
5199     }
5200 
5201     if (lnum != *lnump)
5202 	*pp = ml_get(*lnump);
5203     return retval;
5204 }
5205 
5206 /*
5207  * Recognize the start of a C or C++ comment.
5208  */
5209     static int
5210 cin_iscomment(p)
5211     char_u  *p;
5212 {
5213     return (p[0] == '/' && (p[1] == '*' || p[1] == '/'));
5214 }
5215 
5216 /*
5217  * Recognize the start of a "//" comment.
5218  */
5219     static int
5220 cin_islinecomment(p)
5221     char_u *p;
5222 {
5223     return (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '/');
5224 }
5225 
5226 /*
5227  * Recognize a line that starts with '{' or '}', or ends with ';', '{' or '}'.
5228  * Don't consider "} else" a terminated line.
5229  * Return the character terminating the line (ending char's have precedence if
5230  * both apply in order to determine initializations).
5231  */
5232     static int
5233 cin_isterminated(s, incl_open, incl_comma)
5234     char_u	*s;
5235     int		incl_open;	/* include '{' at the end as terminator */
5236     int		incl_comma;	/* recognize a trailing comma */
5237 {
5238     char_u found_start = 0;
5239 
5240     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5241 
5242     if (*s == '{' || (*s == '}' && !cin_iselse(s)))
5243 	found_start = *s;
5244 
5245     while (*s)
5246     {
5247 	/* skip over comments, "" strings and 'c'haracters */
5248 	s = skip_string(cin_skipcomment(s));
5249 	if ((*s == ';' || (incl_open && *s == '{') || *s == '}'
5250 						 || (incl_comma && *s == ','))
5251 		&& cin_nocode(s + 1))
5252 	    return *s;
5253 
5254 	if (*s)
5255 	    s++;
5256     }
5257     return found_start;
5258 }
5259 
5260 /*
5261  * Recognize the basic picture of a function declaration -- it needs to
5262  * have an open paren somewhere and a close paren at the end of the line and
5263  * no semicolons anywhere.
5264  * When a line ends in a comma we continue looking in the next line.
5265  * "sp" points to a string with the line.  When looking at other lines it must
5266  * be restored to the line.  When it's NULL fetch lines here.
5267  * "lnum" is where we start looking.
5268  */
5269     static int
5270 cin_isfuncdecl(sp, first_lnum)
5271     char_u	**sp;
5272     linenr_T	first_lnum;
5273 {
5274     char_u	*s;
5275     linenr_T	lnum = first_lnum;
5276     int		retval = FALSE;
5277 
5278     if (sp == NULL)
5279 	s = ml_get(lnum);
5280     else
5281 	s = *sp;
5282 
5283     while (*s && *s != '(' && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5284     {
5285 	if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
5286 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5287 	else
5288 	    ++s;
5289     }
5290     if (*s != '(')
5291 	return FALSE;		/* ';', ' or "  before any () or no '(' */
5292 
5293     while (*s && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5294     {
5295 	if (*s == ')' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5296 	{
5297 	    /* ')' at the end: may have found a match
5298 	     * Check for he previous line not to end in a backslash:
5299 	     *       #if defined(x) && \
5300 	     *		 defined(y)
5301 	     */
5302 	    lnum = first_lnum - 1;
5303 	    s = ml_get(lnum);
5304 	    if (*s == NUL || s[STRLEN(s) - 1] != '\\')
5305 		retval = TRUE;
5306 	    goto done;
5307 	}
5308 	if (*s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5309 	{
5310 	    /* ',' at the end: continue looking in the next line */
5311 	    if (lnum >= curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
5312 		break;
5313 
5314 	    s = ml_get(++lnum);
5315 	}
5316 	else if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
5317 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5318 	else
5319 	    ++s;
5320     }
5321 
5322 done:
5323     if (lnum != first_lnum && sp != NULL)
5324 	*sp = ml_get(first_lnum);
5325 
5326     return retval;
5327 }
5328 
5329     static int
5330 cin_isif(p)
5331     char_u  *p;
5332 {
5333     return (STRNCMP(p, "if", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5334 }
5335 
5336     static int
5337 cin_iselse(p)
5338     char_u  *p;
5339 {
5340     if (*p == '}')	    /* accept "} else" */
5341 	p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5342     return (STRNCMP(p, "else", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[4]));
5343 }
5344 
5345     static int
5346 cin_isdo(p)
5347     char_u  *p;
5348 {
5349     return (STRNCMP(p, "do", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5350 }
5351 
5352 /*
5353  * Check if this is a "while" that should have a matching "do".
5354  * We only accept a "while (condition) ;", with only white space between the
5355  * ')' and ';'. The condition may be spread over several lines.
5356  */
5357     static int
5358 cin_iswhileofdo(p, lnum, ind_maxparen)	    /* XXX */
5359     char_u	*p;
5360     linenr_T	lnum;
5361     int		ind_maxparen;
5362 {
5363     pos_T	cursor_save;
5364     pos_T	*trypos;
5365     int		retval = FALSE;
5366 
5367     p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5368     if (*p == '}')		/* accept "} while (cond);" */
5369 	p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5370     if (STRNCMP(p, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]))
5371     {
5372 	cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5373 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5374 	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5375 	p = ml_get_curline();
5376 	while (*p && *p != 'w')	/* skip any '}', until the 'w' of the "while" */
5377 	{
5378 	    ++p;
5379 	    ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
5380 	}
5381 	if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, 0, 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL
5382 		&& *cin_skipcomment(ml_get_pos(trypos) + 1) == ';')
5383 	    retval = TRUE;
5384 	curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5385     }
5386     return retval;
5387 }
5388 
5389     static int
5390 cin_isbreak(p)
5391     char_u  *p;
5392 {
5393     return (STRNCMP(p, "break", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]));
5394 }
5395 
5396 /* Find the position of a C++ base-class declaration or
5397  * constructor-initialization. eg:
5398  *
5399  * class MyClass :
5400  *	baseClass		<-- here
5401  * class MyClass : public baseClass,
5402  *	anotherBaseClass	<-- here (should probably lineup ??)
5403  * MyClass::MyClass(...) :
5404  *	baseClass(...)		<-- here (constructor-initialization)
5405  */
5406     static int
5407 cin_is_cpp_baseclass(line, col)
5408     char_u	*line;
5409     colnr_T	*col;
5410 {
5411     char_u	*s;
5412     int		class_or_struct, lookfor_ctor_init, cpp_base_class;
5413 
5414     *col = 0;
5415 
5416     s = skipwhite(line);
5417     if (*s == '#')		/* skip #define FOO x ? (x) : x */
5418 	return FALSE;
5419     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5420     if (*s == NUL)
5421 	return FALSE;
5422 
5423     cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5424 
5425     while(*s != NUL)
5426     {
5427 	if (s[0] == ':')
5428 	{
5429 	    if (s[1] == ':')
5430 	    {
5431 		/* skip double colon. It can't be a constructor
5432 		 * initialization any more */
5433 		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5434 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 2);
5435 	    }
5436 	    else if (lookfor_ctor_init || class_or_struct)
5437 	    {
5438 		/* we have something found, that looks like the start of
5439 		 * cpp-base-class-declaration or contructor-initialization */
5440 		cpp_base_class = TRUE;
5441 		lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5442 		*col = 0;
5443 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5444 	    }
5445 	    else
5446 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5447 	}
5448 	else if ((STRNCMP(s, "class", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5]))
5449 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "struct", 6) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[6])))
5450 	{
5451 	    class_or_struct = TRUE;
5452 	    lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5453 
5454 	    if (*s == 'c')
5455 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 5);
5456 	    else
5457 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 6);
5458 	}
5459 	else
5460 	{
5461 	    if (s[0] == '{' || s[0] == '}' || s[0] == ';')
5462 	    {
5463 		cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5464 	    }
5465 	    else if (s[0] == ')')
5466 	    {
5467 		/* Constructor-initialization is assumed if we come across
5468 		 * something like "):" */
5469 		class_or_struct = FALSE;
5470 		lookfor_ctor_init = TRUE;
5471 	    }
5472 	    else if (!vim_isIDc(s[0]))
5473 	    {
5474 		/* if it is not an identifier, we are wrong */
5475 		class_or_struct = FALSE;
5476 		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5477 	    }
5478 	    else if (*col == 0)
5479 	    {
5480 		/* it can't be a constructor-initialization any more */
5481 		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5482 
5483 		/* the first statement starts here: lineup with this one... */
5484 		if (cpp_base_class && *col == 0)
5485 		    *col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5486 	    }
5487 
5488 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5489 	}
5490     }
5491 
5492     return cpp_base_class;
5493 }
5494 
5495 /*
5496  * Return TRUE if string "s" ends with the string "find", possibly followed by
5497  * white space and comments.  Skip strings and comments.
5498  * Ignore "ignore" after "find" if it's not NULL.
5499  */
5500     static int
5501 cin_ends_in(s, find, ignore)
5502     char_u	*s;
5503     char_u	*find;
5504     char_u	*ignore;
5505 {
5506     char_u	*p = s;
5507     char_u	*r;
5508     int		len = (int)STRLEN(find);
5509 
5510     while (*p != NUL)
5511     {
5512 	p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5513 	if (STRNCMP(p, find, len) == 0)
5514 	{
5515 	    r = skipwhite(p + len);
5516 	    if (ignore != NULL && STRNCMP(r, ignore, STRLEN(ignore)) == 0)
5517 		r = skipwhite(r + STRLEN(ignore));
5518 	    if (cin_nocode(r))
5519 		return TRUE;
5520 	}
5521 	if (*p != NUL)
5522 	    ++p;
5523     }
5524     return FALSE;
5525 }
5526 
5527 /*
5528  * Skip strings, chars and comments until at or past "trypos".
5529  * Return the column found.
5530  */
5531     static int
5532 cin_skip2pos(trypos)
5533     pos_T	*trypos;
5534 {
5535     char_u	*line;
5536     char_u	*p;
5537 
5538     p = line = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
5539     while (*p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < trypos->col)
5540     {
5541 	if (cin_iscomment(p))
5542 	    p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5543 	else
5544 	{
5545 	    p = skip_string(p);
5546 	    ++p;
5547 	}
5548     }
5549     return (int)(p - line);
5550 }
5551 
5552 /*
5553  * Find the '{' at the start of the block we are in.
5554  * Return NULL if no match found.
5555  * Ignore a '{' that is in a comment, makes indenting the next three lines
5556  * work. */
5557 /* foo()    */
5558 /* {	    */
5559 /* }	    */
5560 
5561     static pos_T *
5562 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
5563     int		ind_maxcomment;
5564 {
5565     pos_T	cursor_save;
5566     pos_T	*trypos;
5567     pos_T	*pos;
5568     static pos_T	pos_copy;
5569 
5570     cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5571     while ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '{', FM_BLOCKSTOP, 0)) != NULL)
5572     {
5573 	pos_copy = *trypos;	/* copy pos_T, next findmatch will change it */
5574 	trypos = &pos_copy;
5575 	curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5576 	pos = NULL;
5577 	/* ignore the { if it's in a // comment */
5578 	if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) == trypos->col
5579 		&& (pos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) /* XXX */
5580 	    break;
5581 	if (pos != NULL)
5582 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
5583     }
5584     curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5585     return trypos;
5586 }
5587 
5588 /*
5589  * Find the matching '(', failing if it is in a comment.
5590  * Return NULL of no match found.
5591  */
5592     static pos_T *
5593 find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
5594     int		ind_maxparen;
5595     int		ind_maxcomment;
5596 {
5597     pos_T	cursor_save;
5598     pos_T	*trypos;
5599     static pos_T	pos_copy;
5600 
5601     cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5602     if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '(', 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL)
5603     {
5604 	/* check if the ( is in a // comment */
5605 	if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) > trypos->col)
5606 	    trypos = NULL;
5607 	else
5608 	{
5609 	    pos_copy = *trypos;	    /* copy trypos, findmatch will change it */
5610 	    trypos = &pos_copy;
5611 	    curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5612 	    if (find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) != NULL) /* XXX */
5613 		trypos = NULL;
5614 	}
5615     }
5616     curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5617     return trypos;
5618 }
5619 
5620 /*
5621  * Return ind_maxparen corrected for the difference in line number between the
5622  * cursor position and "startpos".  This makes sure that searching for a
5623  * matching paren above the cursor line doesn't find a match because of
5624  * looking a few lines further.
5625  */
5626     static int
5627 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, startpos)
5628     int		ind_maxparen;
5629     pos_T	*startpos;
5630 {
5631     long	n = (long)startpos->lnum - (long)curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5632 
5633     if (n > 0 && n < ind_maxparen / 2)
5634 	return ind_maxparen - (int)n;
5635     return ind_maxparen;
5636 }
5637 
5638 /*
5639  * Set w_cursor.col to the column number of the last unmatched ')' or '{' in
5640  * line "l".
5641  */
5642     static int
5643 find_last_paren(l, start, end)
5644     char_u	*l;
5645     int		start, end;
5646 {
5647     int		i;
5648     int		retval = FALSE;
5649     int		open_count = 0;
5650 
5651     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;		    /* default is start of line */
5652 
5653     for (i = 0; l[i]; i++)
5654     {
5655 	i = (int)(cin_skipcomment(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in comments */
5656 	i = (int)(skip_string(l + i) - l);    /* ignore parens in quotes */
5657 	if (l[i] == start)
5658 	    ++open_count;
5659 	else if (l[i] == end)
5660 	{
5661 	    if (open_count > 0)
5662 		--open_count;
5663 	    else
5664 	    {
5665 		curwin->w_cursor.col = i;
5666 		retval = TRUE;
5667 	    }
5668 	}
5669     }
5670     return retval;
5671 }
5672 
5673     int
5674 get_c_indent()
5675 {
5676     /*
5677      * spaces from a block's opening brace the prevailing indent for that
5678      * block should be
5679      */
5680     int ind_level = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5681 
5682     /*
5683      * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace that's at the end of a
5684      * line is imagined to be.
5685      */
5686     int ind_open_imag = 0;
5687 
5688     /*
5689      * spaces from the prevailing indent for a line that is not precededof by
5690      * an opening brace.
5691      */
5692     int ind_no_brace = 0;
5693 
5694     /*
5695      * column where the first { of a function should be located }
5696      */
5697     int ind_first_open = 0;
5698 
5699     /*
5700      * spaces from the prevailing indent a leftmost open brace should be
5701      * located
5702      */
5703     int ind_open_extra = 0;
5704 
5705     /*
5706      * spaces from the matching open brace (real location for one at the left
5707      * edge; imaginary location from one that ends a line) the matching close
5708      * brace should be located
5709      */
5710     int ind_close_extra = 0;
5711 
5712     /*
5713      * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace sitting in the leftmost
5714      * column is imagined to be
5715      */
5716     int ind_open_left_imag = 0;
5717 
5718     /*
5719      * spaces from the switch() indent a "case xx" label should be located
5720      */
5721     int ind_case = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5722 
5723     /*
5724      * spaces from the "case xx:" code after a switch() should be located
5725      */
5726     int ind_case_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5727 
5728     /*
5729      * lineup break at end of case in switch() with case label
5730      */
5731     int ind_case_break = 0;
5732 
5733     /*
5734      * spaces from the class declaration indent a scope declaration label
5735      * should be located
5736      */
5737     int ind_scopedecl = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5738 
5739     /*
5740      * spaces from the scope declaration label code should be located
5741      */
5742     int ind_scopedecl_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5743 
5744     /*
5745      * amount K&R-style parameters should be indented
5746      */
5747     int ind_param = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5748 
5749     /*
5750      * amount a function type spec should be indented
5751      */
5752     int ind_func_type = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5753 
5754     /*
5755      * amount a cpp base class declaration or constructor initialization
5756      * should be indented
5757      */
5758     int ind_cpp_baseclass = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5759 
5760     /*
5761      * additional spaces beyond the prevailing indent a continuation line
5762      * should be located
5763      */
5764     int ind_continuation = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5765 
5766     /*
5767      * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses
5768      */
5769     int ind_unclosed = curbuf->b_p_sw * 2;
5770 
5771     /*
5772      * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses, which
5773      * itself is also unclosed
5774      */
5775     int ind_unclosed2 = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5776 
5777     /*
5778      * suppress ignoring spaces from the indent of a line starting with an
5779      * unclosed parentheses.
5780      */
5781     int ind_unclosed_noignore = 0;
5782 
5783     /*
5784      * If the opening paren is the last nonwhite character on the line, and
5785      * ind_unclosed_wrapped is nonzero, use this indent relative to the outer
5786      * context (for very long lines).
5787      */
5788     int ind_unclosed_wrapped = 0;
5789 
5790     /*
5791      * suppress ignoring white space when lining up with the character after
5792      * an unclosed parentheses.
5793      */
5794     int ind_unclosed_whiteok = 0;
5795 
5796     /*
5797      * indent a closing parentheses under the line start of the matching
5798      * opening parentheses.
5799      */
5800     int ind_matching_paren = 0;
5801 
5802     /*
5803      * Extra indent for comments.
5804      */
5805     int ind_comment = 0;
5806 
5807     /*
5808      * spaces from the comment opener when there is nothing after it.
5809      */
5810     int ind_in_comment = 3;
5811 
5812     /*
5813      * boolean: if non-zero, use ind_in_comment even if there is something
5814      * after the comment opener.
5815      */
5816     int ind_in_comment2 = 0;
5817 
5818     /*
5819      * max lines to search for an open paren
5820      */
5821     int ind_maxparen = 20;
5822 
5823     /*
5824      * max lines to search for an open comment
5825      */
5826     int ind_maxcomment = 70;
5827 
5828     /*
5829      * handle braces for java code
5830      */
5831     int	ind_java = 0;
5832 
5833     /*
5834      * handle blocked cases correctly
5835      */
5836     int ind_keep_case_label = 0;
5837 
5838     pos_T	cur_curpos;
5839     int		amount;
5840     int		scope_amount;
5841     int		cur_amount;
5842     colnr_T	col;
5843     char_u	*theline;
5844     char_u	*linecopy;
5845     pos_T	*trypos;
5846     pos_T	*tryposBrace = NULL;
5847     pos_T	our_paren_pos;
5848     char_u	*start;
5849     int		start_brace;
5850 #define BRACE_IN_COL0		1	    /* '{' is in comumn 0 */
5851 #define BRACE_AT_START		2	    /* '{' is at start of line */
5852 #define BRACE_AT_END		3	    /* '{' is at end of line */
5853     linenr_T	ourscope;
5854     char_u	*l;
5855     char_u	*look;
5856     char_u	terminated;
5857     int		lookfor;
5858 #define LOOKFOR_INITIAL		0
5859 #define LOOKFOR_IF		1
5860 #define LOOKFOR_DO		2
5861 #define LOOKFOR_CASE		3
5862 #define LOOKFOR_ANY		4
5863 #define LOOKFOR_TERM		5
5864 #define LOOKFOR_UNTERM		6
5865 #define LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL	7
5866 #define LOOKFOR_NOBREAK		8
5867 #define LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS	9
5868 #define LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT	10
5869 
5870     int		whilelevel;
5871     linenr_T	lnum;
5872     char_u	*options;
5873     int		fraction = 0;	    /* init for GCC */
5874     int		divider;
5875     int		n;
5876     int		iscase;
5877     int		lookfor_break;
5878     int		cont_amount = 0;    /* amount for continuation line */
5879 
5880     for (options = curbuf->b_p_cino; *options; )
5881     {
5882 	l = options++;
5883 	if (*options == '-')
5884 	    ++options;
5885 	n = getdigits(&options);
5886 	divider = 0;
5887 	if (*options == '.')	    /* ".5s" means a fraction */
5888 	{
5889 	    fraction = atol((char *)++options);
5890 	    while (VIM_ISDIGIT(*options))
5891 	    {
5892 		++options;
5893 		if (divider)
5894 		    divider *= 10;
5895 		else
5896 		    divider = 10;
5897 	    }
5898 	}
5899 	if (*options == 's')	    /* "2s" means two times 'shiftwidth' */
5900 	{
5901 	    if (n == 0 && fraction == 0)
5902 		n = curbuf->b_p_sw;	/* just "s" is one 'shiftwidth' */
5903 	    else
5904 	    {
5905 		n *= curbuf->b_p_sw;
5906 		if (divider)
5907 		    n += (curbuf->b_p_sw * fraction + divider / 2) / divider;
5908 	    }
5909 	    ++options;
5910 	}
5911 	if (l[1] == '-')
5912 	    n = -n;
5913 	/* When adding an entry here, also update the default 'cinoptions' in
5914 	 * change.txt, and add explanation for it! */
5915 	switch (*l)
5916 	{
5917 	    case '>': ind_level = n; break;
5918 	    case 'e': ind_open_imag = n; break;
5919 	    case 'n': ind_no_brace = n; break;
5920 	    case 'f': ind_first_open = n; break;
5921 	    case '{': ind_open_extra = n; break;
5922 	    case '}': ind_close_extra = n; break;
5923 	    case '^': ind_open_left_imag = n; break;
5924 	    case ':': ind_case = n; break;
5925 	    case '=': ind_case_code = n; break;
5926 	    case 'b': ind_case_break = n; break;
5927 	    case 'p': ind_param = n; break;
5928 	    case 't': ind_func_type = n; break;
5929 	    case '/': ind_comment = n; break;
5930 	    case 'c': ind_in_comment = n; break;
5931 	    case 'C': ind_in_comment2 = n; break;
5932 	    case 'i': ind_cpp_baseclass = n; break;
5933 	    case '+': ind_continuation = n; break;
5934 	    case '(': ind_unclosed = n; break;
5935 	    case 'u': ind_unclosed2 = n; break;
5936 	    case 'U': ind_unclosed_noignore = n; break;
5937 	    case 'W': ind_unclosed_wrapped = n; break;
5938 	    case 'w': ind_unclosed_whiteok = n; break;
5939 	    case 'm': ind_matching_paren = n; break;
5940 	    case ')': ind_maxparen = n; break;
5941 	    case '*': ind_maxcomment = n; break;
5942 	    case 'g': ind_scopedecl = n; break;
5943 	    case 'h': ind_scopedecl_code = n; break;
5944 	    case 'j': ind_java = n; break;
5945 	    case 'l': ind_keep_case_label = n; break;
5946 	}
5947     }
5948 
5949     /* remember where the cursor was when we started */
5950     cur_curpos = curwin->w_cursor;
5951 
5952     /* Get a copy of the current contents of the line.
5953      * This is required, because only the most recent line obtained with
5954      * ml_get is valid! */
5955     linecopy = vim_strsave(ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum));
5956     if (linecopy == NULL)
5957 	return 0;
5958 
5959     /*
5960      * In insert mode and the cursor is on a ')' truncate the line at the
5961      * cursor position.  We don't want to line up with the matching '(' when
5962      * inserting new stuff.
5963      * For unknown reasons the cursor might be past the end of the line, thus
5964      * check for that.
5965      */
5966     if ((State & INSERT)
5967 	    && curwin->w_cursor.col < STRLEN(linecopy)
5968 	    && linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] == ')')
5969 	linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
5970 
5971     theline = skipwhite(linecopy);
5972 
5973     /* move the cursor to the start of the line */
5974 
5975     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5976 
5977     /*
5978      * #defines and so on always go at the left when included in 'cinkeys'.
5979      */
5980     if (*theline == '#' && (*linecopy == '#' || in_cinkeys('#', ' ', TRUE)))
5981     {
5982 	amount = 0;
5983     }
5984 
5985     /*
5986      * Is it a non-case label?	Then that goes at the left margin too.
5987      */
5988     else if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))	    /* XXX */
5989     {
5990 	amount = 0;
5991     }
5992 
5993     /*
5994      * If we're inside a "//" comment and there is a "//" comment in a
5995      * previous line, lineup with that one.
5996      */
5997     else if (cin_islinecomment(theline)
5998 	    && (trypos = find_line_comment()) != NULL) /* XXX */
5999     {
6000 	/* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
6001 	getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6002 	amount = col;
6003     }
6004 
6005     /*
6006      * If we're inside a comment and not looking at the start of the
6007      * comment, try using the 'comments' option.
6008      */
6009     else if (!cin_iscomment(theline)
6010 	    && (trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
6011     {
6012 	int	lead_start_len = 2;
6013 	int	lead_middle_len = 1;
6014 	char_u	lead_start[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* start-comment string */
6015 	char_u	lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* middle-comment string */
6016 	char_u	lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN];		/* end-comment string */
6017 	char_u	*p;
6018 	int	start_align = 0;
6019 	int	start_off = 0;
6020 	int	done = FALSE;
6021 
6022 	/* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
6023 	getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6024 	amount = col;
6025 
6026 	p = curbuf->b_p_com;
6027 	while (*p != NUL)
6028 	{
6029 	    int	align = 0;
6030 	    int	off = 0;
6031 	    int what = 0;
6032 
6033 	    while (*p != NUL && *p != ':')
6034 	    {
6035 		if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_END || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
6036 		    what = *p++;
6037 		else if (*p == COM_LEFT || *p == COM_RIGHT)
6038 		    align = *p++;
6039 		else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
6040 		    off = getdigits(&p);
6041 		else
6042 		    ++p;
6043 	    }
6044 
6045 	    if (*p == ':')
6046 		++p;
6047 	    (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
6048 	    if (what == COM_START)
6049 	    {
6050 		STRCPY(lead_start, lead_end);
6051 		lead_start_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_start);
6052 		start_off = off;
6053 		start_align = align;
6054 	    }
6055 	    else if (what == COM_MIDDLE)
6056 	    {
6057 		STRCPY(lead_middle, lead_end);
6058 		lead_middle_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
6059 	    }
6060 	    else if (what == COM_END)
6061 	    {
6062 		/* If our line starts with the middle comment string, line it
6063 		 * up with the comment opener per the 'comments' option. */
6064 		if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) == 0
6065 			&& STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) != 0)
6066 		{
6067 		    done = TRUE;
6068 		    if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6069 		    {
6070 			/* If the start comment string matches in the previous
6071 			 * line, use the indent of that line pluss offset.  If
6072 			 * the middle comment string matches in the previous
6073 			 * line, use the indent of that line.  XXX */
6074 			look = skipwhite(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1));
6075 			if (STRNCMP(look, lead_start, lead_start_len) == 0)
6076 			    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6077 			else if (STRNCMP(look, lead_middle,
6078 							lead_middle_len) == 0)
6079 			{
6080 			    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6081 			    break;
6082 			}
6083 			/* If the start comment string doesn't match with the
6084 			 * start of the comment, skip this entry. XXX */
6085 			else if (STRNCMP(ml_get(trypos->lnum) + trypos->col,
6086 					     lead_start, lead_start_len) != 0)
6087 			    continue;
6088 		    }
6089 		    if (start_off != 0)
6090 			amount += start_off;
6091 		    else if (start_align == COM_RIGHT)
6092 			amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6093 						   - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
6094 		    break;
6095 		}
6096 
6097 		/* If our line starts with the end comment string, line it up
6098 		 * with the middle comment */
6099 		if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) != 0
6100 			&& STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) == 0)
6101 		{
6102 		    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6103 								     /* XXX */
6104 		    if (off != 0)
6105 			amount += off;
6106 		    else if (align == COM_RIGHT)
6107 			amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6108 						   - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
6109 		    done = TRUE;
6110 		    break;
6111 		}
6112 	    }
6113 	}
6114 
6115 	/* If our line starts with an asterisk, line up with the
6116 	 * asterisk in the comment opener; otherwise, line up
6117 	 * with the first character of the comment text.
6118 	 */
6119 	if (done)
6120 	    ;
6121 	else if (theline[0] == '*')
6122 	    amount += 1;
6123 	else
6124 	{
6125 	    /*
6126 	     * If we are more than one line away from the comment opener, take
6127 	     * the indent of the previous non-empty line.  If 'cino' has "CO"
6128 	     * and we are just below the comment opener and there are any
6129 	     * white characters after it line up with the text after it;
6130 	     * otherwise, add the amount specified by "c" in 'cino'
6131 	     */
6132 	    amount = -1;
6133 	    for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > trypos->lnum; --lnum)
6134 	    {
6135 		if (linewhite(lnum))		    /* skip blank lines */
6136 		    continue;
6137 		amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum);	    /* XXX */
6138 		break;
6139 	    }
6140 	    if (amount == -1)			    /* use the comment opener */
6141 	    {
6142 		if (!ind_in_comment2)
6143 		{
6144 		    start = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
6145 		    look = start + trypos->col + 2; /* skip / and * */
6146 		    if (*look != NUL)		    /* if something after it */
6147 			trypos->col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(look) - start);
6148 		}
6149 		getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6150 		amount = col;
6151 		if (ind_in_comment2 || *look == NUL)
6152 		    amount += ind_in_comment;
6153 	    }
6154 	}
6155     }
6156 
6157     /*
6158      * Are we inside parentheses or braces?
6159      */						    /* XXX */
6160     else if (((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6161 		&& ind_java == 0)
6162 	    || (tryposBrace = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6163 	    || trypos != NULL)
6164     {
6165       if (trypos != NULL && tryposBrace != NULL)
6166       {
6167 	  /* Both an unmatched '(' and '{' is found.  Use the one which is
6168 	   * closer to the current cursor position, set the other to NULL. */
6169 	  if (trypos->lnum != tryposBrace->lnum
6170 		  ? trypos->lnum < tryposBrace->lnum
6171 		  : trypos->col < tryposBrace->col)
6172 	      trypos = NULL;
6173 	  else
6174 	      tryposBrace = NULL;
6175       }
6176 
6177       if (trypos != NULL)
6178       {
6179 	/*
6180 	 * If the matching paren is more than one line away, use the indent of
6181 	 * a previous non-empty line that matches the same paren.
6182 	 */
6183 	amount = -1;
6184 	cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6185 	our_paren_pos = *trypos;
6186 	for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > our_paren_pos.lnum; --lnum)
6187 	{
6188 	    l = skipwhite(ml_get(lnum));
6189 	    if (cin_nocode(l))		/* skip comment lines */
6190 		continue;
6191 	    if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &lnum))	/* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
6192 		continue;
6193 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
6194 
6195 	    /* Skip a comment. XXX */
6196 	    if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6197 	    {
6198 		lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6199 		continue;
6200 	    }
6201 
6202 	    /* XXX */
6203 	    if ((trypos = find_match_paren(
6204 			    corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6205 						      ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6206 		    && trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum
6207 		    && trypos->col == our_paren_pos.col)
6208 	    {
6209 		    amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum);	/* XXX */
6210 
6211 		    if (theline[0] == ')')
6212 		    {
6213 			if (our_paren_pos.lnum != lnum && cur_amount > amount)
6214 			    cur_amount = amount;
6215 			amount = -1;
6216 		    }
6217 		break;
6218 	    }
6219 	}
6220 
6221 	/*
6222 	 * Line up with line where the matching paren is. XXX
6223 	 * If the line starts with a '(' or the indent for unclosed
6224 	 * parentheses is zero, line up with the unclosed parentheses.
6225 	 */
6226 	if (amount == -1)
6227 	{
6228 	    amount = skip_label(our_paren_pos.lnum, &look, ind_maxcomment);
6229 	    if (theline[0] == ')' || ind_unclosed == 0
6230 		       || (!ind_unclosed_noignore && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
6231 	    {
6232 		/*
6233 		 * If we're looking at a close paren, line up right there;
6234 		 * otherwise, line up with the next (non-white) character.
6235 		 * When ind_unclosed_wrapped is set and the matching paren is
6236 		 * the last nonwhite character of the line, use either the
6237 		 * indent of the current line or the indentation of the next
6238 		 * outer paren and add ind_unclosed_wrapped (for very long
6239 		 * lines).
6240 		 */
6241 		if (theline[0] != ')')
6242 		{
6243 		    cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6244 		    l = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum);
6245 		    if (ind_unclosed_wrapped
6246 				       && cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"(", NULL))
6247 		    {
6248 			/* look for opening unmatched paren, indent one level
6249 			 * for each additional level */
6250 			n = 1;
6251 			for (col = 0; col < our_paren_pos.col; ++col)
6252 			{
6253 			    switch (l[col])
6254 			    {
6255 				case '(':
6256 				case '{': ++n;
6257 					  break;
6258 
6259 				case ')':
6260 				case '}': if (n > 1)
6261 					      --n;
6262 					  break;
6263 			    }
6264 			}
6265 
6266 			our_paren_pos.col = 0;
6267 			amount += n * ind_unclosed_wrapped;
6268 		    }
6269 		    else if (ind_unclosed_whiteok)
6270 			our_paren_pos.col++;
6271 		    else
6272 		    {
6273 			col = our_paren_pos.col + 1;
6274 			while (vim_iswhite(l[col]))
6275 			    col++;
6276 			if (l[col] != NUL)	/* In case of trailing space */
6277 			    our_paren_pos.col = col;
6278 			else
6279 			    our_paren_pos.col++;
6280 		    }
6281 		}
6282 
6283 		/*
6284 		 * Find how indented the paren is, or the character after it
6285 		 * if we did the above "if".
6286 		 */
6287 		if (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6288 		{
6289 		    getvcol(curwin, &our_paren_pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6290 		    if (cur_amount > (int)col)
6291 			cur_amount = col;
6292 		}
6293 	    }
6294 
6295 	    if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_matching_paren)
6296 	    {
6297 		/* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */
6298 	    }
6299 	    else if (ind_unclosed == 0 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore
6300 						  && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
6301 	    {
6302 		if (cur_amount != MAXCOL)
6303 		    amount = cur_amount;
6304 	    }
6305 	    else
6306 	    {
6307 		/* add ind_unclosed2 for each '(' before our matching one */
6308 		col = our_paren_pos.col;
6309 		while (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6310 		{
6311 		    --our_paren_pos.col;
6312 		    switch (*ml_get_pos(&our_paren_pos))
6313 		    {
6314 			case '(': amount += ind_unclosed2;
6315 				  col = our_paren_pos.col;
6316 				  break;
6317 			case ')': amount -= ind_unclosed2;
6318 				  col = MAXCOL;
6319 				  break;
6320 		    }
6321 		}
6322 
6323 		/* Use ind_unclosed once, when the first '(' is not inside
6324 		 * braces */
6325 		if (col == MAXCOL)
6326 		    amount += ind_unclosed;
6327 		else
6328 		{
6329 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum;
6330 		    curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6331 		    if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6332 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6333 			amount += ind_unclosed2;
6334 		    else
6335 			amount += ind_unclosed;
6336 		}
6337 		/*
6338 		 * For a line starting with ')' use the minimum of the two
6339 		 * positions, to avoid giving it more indent than the previous
6340 		 * lines:
6341 		 *  func_long_name(		    if (x
6342 		 *	arg				    && yy
6343 		 *	)	  ^ not here	       )    ^ not here
6344 		 */
6345 		if (cur_amount < amount)
6346 		    amount = cur_amount;
6347 	    }
6348 	}
6349 
6350 	/* add extra indent for a comment */
6351 	if (cin_iscomment(theline))
6352 	    amount += ind_comment;
6353       }
6354 
6355       /*
6356        * Are we at least inside braces, then?
6357        */
6358       else
6359       {
6360 	trypos = tryposBrace;
6361 
6362 	ourscope = trypos->lnum;
6363 	start = ml_get(ourscope);
6364 
6365 	/*
6366 	 * Now figure out how indented the line is in general.
6367 	 * If the brace was at the start of the line, we use that;
6368 	 * otherwise, check out the indentation of the line as
6369 	 * a whole and then add the "imaginary indent" to that.
6370 	 */
6371 	look = skipwhite(start);
6372 	if (*look == '{')
6373 	{
6374 	    getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6375 	    amount = col;
6376 	    if (*start == '{')
6377 		start_brace = BRACE_IN_COL0;
6378 	    else
6379 		start_brace = BRACE_AT_START;
6380 	}
6381 	else
6382 	{
6383 	    /*
6384 	     * that opening brace might have been on a continuation
6385 	     * line.  if so, find the start of the line.
6386 	     */
6387 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = ourscope;
6388 
6389 	    /*
6390 	     * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6391 	     * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6392 	     */
6393 	    lnum = ourscope;
6394 	    if (find_last_paren(start, '(', ')')
6395 		    && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6396 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6397 		lnum = trypos->lnum;
6398 
6399 	    /*
6400 	     * It could have been something like
6401 	     *	   case 1: if (asdf &&
6402 	     *			ldfd) {
6403 	     *		    }
6404 	     */
6405 	    if (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
6406 		amount = get_indent();
6407 	    else
6408 		amount = skip_label(lnum, &l, ind_maxcomment);
6409 
6410 	    start_brace = BRACE_AT_END;
6411 	}
6412 
6413 	/*
6414 	 * if we're looking at a closing brace, that's where
6415 	 * we want to be.  otherwise, add the amount of room
6416 	 * that an indent is supposed to be.
6417 	 */
6418 	if (theline[0] == '}')
6419 	{
6420 	    /*
6421 	     * they may want closing braces to line up with something
6422 	     * other than the open brace.  indulge them, if so.
6423 	     */
6424 	    amount += ind_close_extra;
6425 	}
6426 	else
6427 	{
6428 	    /*
6429 	     * If we're looking at an "else", try to find an "if"
6430 	     * to match it with.
6431 	     * If we're looking at a "while", try to find a "do"
6432 	     * to match it with.
6433 	     */
6434 	    lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6435 	    if (cin_iselse(theline))
6436 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_IF;
6437 	    else if (cin_iswhileofdo(theline, cur_curpos.lnum, ind_maxparen))
6438 								    /* XXX */
6439 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_DO;
6440 	    if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_INITIAL)
6441 	    {
6442 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum = cur_curpos.lnum;
6443 		if (find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen,
6444 							ind_maxcomment) == OK)
6445 		{
6446 		    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
6447 		    goto theend;
6448 		}
6449 	    }
6450 
6451 	    /*
6452 	     * We get here if we are not on an "while-of-do" or "else" (or
6453 	     * failed to find a matching "if").
6454 	     * Search backwards for something to line up with.
6455 	     * First set amount for when we don't find anything.
6456 	     */
6457 
6458 	    /*
6459 	     * if the '{' is  _really_ at the left margin, use the imaginary
6460 	     * location of a left-margin brace.  Otherwise, correct the
6461 	     * location for ind_open_extra.
6462 	     */
6463 
6464 	    if (start_brace == BRACE_IN_COL0)	    /* '{' is in column 0 */
6465 	    {
6466 		amount = ind_open_left_imag;
6467 	    }
6468 	    else
6469 	    {
6470 		if (start_brace == BRACE_AT_END)    /* '{' is at end of line */
6471 		    amount += ind_open_imag;
6472 		else
6473 		{
6474 		    /* Compensate for adding ind_open_extra later. */
6475 		    amount -= ind_open_extra;
6476 		    if (amount < 0)
6477 			amount = 0;
6478 		}
6479 	    }
6480 
6481 	    lookfor_break = FALSE;
6482 
6483 	    if (cin_iscase(theline))	/* it's a switch() label */
6484 	    {
6485 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_CASE;	/* find a previous switch() label */
6486 		amount += ind_case;
6487 	    }
6488 	    else if (cin_isscopedecl(theline))	/* private:, ... */
6489 	    {
6490 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL;	/* class decl is this block */
6491 		amount += ind_scopedecl;
6492 	    }
6493 	    else
6494 	    {
6495 		if (ind_case_break && cin_isbreak(theline))	/* break; ... */
6496 		    lookfor_break = TRUE;
6497 
6498 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6499 		amount += ind_level;	/* ind_level from start of block */
6500 	    }
6501 	    scope_amount = amount;
6502 	    whilelevel = 0;
6503 
6504 	    /*
6505 	     * Search backwards.  If we find something we recognize, line up
6506 	     * with that.
6507 	     *
6508 	     * if we're looking at an open brace, indent
6509 	     * the usual amount relative to the conditional
6510 	     * that opens the block.
6511 	     */
6512 	    curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
6513 	    for (;;)
6514 	    {
6515 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
6516 		curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
6517 
6518 		/*
6519 		 * If we went all the way back to the start of our scope, line
6520 		 * up with it.
6521 		 */
6522 		if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum <= ourscope)
6523 		{
6524 		    /* we reached end of scope:
6525 		     * if looking for a enum or structure initialization
6526 		     * go further back:
6527 		     * if it is an initializer (enum xxx or xxx =), then
6528 		     * don't add ind_continuation, otherwise it is a variable
6529 		     * declaration:
6530 		     * int x,
6531 		     *     here; <-- add ind_continuation
6532 		     */
6533 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6534 		    {
6535 			if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum == 0
6536 				|| curwin->w_cursor.lnum
6537 						    < ourscope - ind_maxparen)
6538 			{
6539 			    /* nothing found (abuse ind_maxparen as limit)
6540 			     * assume terminated line (i.e. a variable
6541 			     * initialization) */
6542 			    if (cont_amount > 0)
6543 				amount = cont_amount;
6544 			    else
6545 				amount += ind_continuation;
6546 			    break;
6547 			}
6548 
6549 			l = ml_get_curline();
6550 
6551 			/*
6552 			 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the
6553 			 * comment.
6554 			 */
6555 			trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment);
6556 			if (trypos != NULL)
6557 			{
6558 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6559 			    continue;
6560 			}
6561 
6562 			/*
6563 			 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
6564 			 */
6565 			if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6566 			    continue;
6567 
6568 			if (cin_nocode(l))
6569 			    continue;
6570 
6571 			terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6572 
6573 			/*
6574 			 * If we are at top level and the line looks like a
6575 			 * function declaration, we are done
6576 			 * (it's a variable declaration).
6577 			 */
6578 			if (start_brace != BRACE_IN_COL0
6579 				|| !cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6580 			{
6581 			    /* if the line is terminated with another ','
6582 			     * it is a continued variable initialization.
6583 			     * don't add extra indent.
6584 			     * TODO: does not work, if  a function
6585 			     * declaration is split over multiple lines:
6586 			     * cin_isfuncdecl returns FALSE then.
6587 			     */
6588 			    if (terminated == ',')
6589 				break;
6590 
6591 			    /* if it es a enum declaration or an assignment,
6592 			     * we are done.
6593 			     */
6594 			    if (terminated != ';' && cin_isinit())
6595 				break;
6596 
6597 			    /* nothing useful found */
6598 			    if (terminated == 0 || terminated == '{')
6599 				continue;
6600 			}
6601 
6602 			if (terminated != ';')
6603 			{
6604 			    /* Skip parens and braces. Position the cursor
6605 			     * over the rightmost paren, so that matching it
6606 			     * will take us back to the start of the line.
6607 			     */					/* XXX */
6608 			    trypos = NULL;
6609 			    if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'))
6610 				trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6611 					ind_maxcomment);
6612 
6613 			    if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6614 				trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6615 
6616 			    if (trypos != NULL)
6617 			    {
6618 				curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6619 				continue;
6620 			    }
6621 			}
6622 
6623 			/* it's a variable declaration, add indentation
6624 			 * like in
6625 			 * int a,
6626 			 *    b;
6627 			 */
6628 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6629 			    amount = cont_amount;
6630 			else
6631 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6632 		    }
6633 		    else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6634 		    {
6635 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6636 			    amount = cont_amount;
6637 			else
6638 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6639 		    }
6640 		    else if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6641 					  && lookfor != LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6642 		    {
6643 			amount = scope_amount;
6644 			if (theline[0] == '{')
6645 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
6646 		    }
6647 		    break;
6648 		}
6649 
6650 		/*
6651 		 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
6652 		 */					    /* XXX */
6653 		if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6654 		{
6655 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6656 		    continue;
6657 		}
6658 
6659 		l = ml_get_curline();
6660 
6661 		/*
6662 		 * If this is a switch() label, may line up relative to that.
6663 		 * if this is a C++ scope declaration, do the same.
6664 		 */
6665 		iscase = cin_iscase(l);
6666 		if (iscase || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6667 		{
6668 		    /* we are only looking for cpp base class
6669 		     * declaration/initialization any longer */
6670 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6671 			break;
6672 
6673 		    /* When looking for a "do" we are not interested in
6674 		     * labels. */
6675 		    if (whilelevel > 0)
6676 			continue;
6677 
6678 		    /*
6679 		     *	case xx:
6680 		     *	    c = 99 +	    <- this indent plus continuation
6681 		     *->	   here;
6682 		     */
6683 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6684 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6685 		    {
6686 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6687 			    amount = cont_amount;
6688 			else
6689 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6690 			break;
6691 		    }
6692 
6693 		    /*
6694 		     *	case xx:	<- line up with this case
6695 		     *	    x = 333;
6696 		     *	case yy:
6697 		     */
6698 		    if (       (iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE)
6699 			    || (iscase && lookfor_break)
6700 			    || (!iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL))
6701 		    {
6702 			/*
6703 			 * Check that this case label is not for another
6704 			 * switch()
6705 			 */				    /* XXX */
6706 			if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) ==
6707 					     NULL || trypos->lnum == ourscope)
6708 			{
6709 			    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
6710 			    break;
6711 			}
6712 			continue;
6713 		    }
6714 
6715 		    n = get_indent_nolabel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum);  /* XXX */
6716 
6717 		    /*
6718 		     *	 case xx: if (cond)	    <- line up with this if
6719 		     *		      y = y + 1;
6720 		     * ->	  s = 99;
6721 		     *
6722 		     *	 case xx:
6723 		     *	     if (cond)		<- line up with this line
6724 		     *		 y = y + 1;
6725 		     * ->    s = 99;
6726 		     */
6727 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
6728 		    {
6729 			if (n)
6730 			    amount = n;
6731 
6732 			if (!lookfor_break)
6733 			    break;
6734 		    }
6735 
6736 		    /*
6737 		     *	 case xx: x = x + 1;	    <- line up with this x
6738 		     * ->	  y = y + 1;
6739 		     *
6740 		     *	 case xx: if (cond)	    <- line up with this if
6741 		     * ->	       y = y + 1;
6742 		     */
6743 		    if (n)
6744 		    {
6745 			amount = n;
6746 			l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6747 			if (l != NULL && cin_is_cinword(l))
6748 			    amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6749 			break;
6750 		    }
6751 
6752 		    /*
6753 		     * Try to get the indent of a statement before the switch
6754 		     * label.  If nothing is found, line up relative to the
6755 		     * switch label.
6756 		     *	    break;		<- may line up with this line
6757 		     *	 case xx:
6758 		     * ->   y = 1;
6759 		     */
6760 		    scope_amount = get_indent() + (iscase    /* XXX */
6761 					? ind_case_code : ind_scopedecl_code);
6762 		    lookfor = ind_case_break ? LOOKFOR_NOBREAK : LOOKFOR_ANY;
6763 		    continue;
6764 		}
6765 
6766 		/*
6767 		 * Looking for a switch() label or C++ scope declaration,
6768 		 * ignore other lines, skip {}-blocks.
6769 		 */
6770 		if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE || lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL)
6771 		{
6772 		    if (find_last_paren(l, '{', '}') && (trypos =
6773 				    find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6774 			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6775 		    continue;
6776 		}
6777 
6778 		/*
6779 		 * Ignore jump labels with nothing after them.
6780 		 */
6781 		if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
6782 		{
6783 		    l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6784 		    if (l == NULL || cin_nocode(l))
6785 			continue;
6786 		}
6787 
6788 		/*
6789 		 * Ignore #defines, #if, etc.
6790 		 * Ignore comment and empty lines.
6791 		 * (need to get the line again, cin_islabel() may have
6792 		 * unlocked it)
6793 		 */
6794 		l = ml_get_curline();
6795 		if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
6796 							     || cin_nocode(l))
6797 		    continue;
6798 
6799 		/*
6800 		 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or
6801 		 * constructor initialization?
6802 		 */						    /* XXX */
6803 		if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM && ind_cpp_baseclass
6804 					     && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
6805 		{
6806 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6807 		    {
6808 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6809 			    amount = cont_amount;
6810 			else
6811 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6812 		    }
6813 		    else if (col == 0 || theline[0] == '{')
6814 		    {
6815 			amount = get_indent();
6816 			if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
6817 				&& (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6818 					ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6819 			    amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum); /* XXX */
6820 			if (theline[0] != '{')
6821 			    amount += ind_cpp_baseclass;
6822 		    }
6823 		    else
6824 		    {
6825 			curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6826 			getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
6827 			amount = (int)col;
6828 		    }
6829 		    break;
6830 		}
6831 		else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6832 		{
6833 		    /* only look, whether there is a cpp base class
6834 		     * declaration or initialization before the opening brace. */
6835 		    if (cin_isterminated(l, TRUE, FALSE))
6836 			break;
6837 		    else
6838 			continue;
6839 		}
6840 
6841 		/*
6842 		 * What happens next depends on the line being terminated.
6843 		 * If terminated with a ',' only consider it terminating if
6844 		 * there is anoter unterminated statement behind, eg:
6845 		 *   123,
6846 		 *   sizeof
6847 		 *	  here
6848 		 * Otherwise check whether it is a enumeration or structure
6849 		 * initialisation (not indented) or a variable declaration
6850 		 * (indented).
6851 		 */
6852 		terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6853 
6854 		if (terminated == 0 || (lookfor != LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6855 							&& terminated == ','))
6856 		{
6857 		    /*
6858 		     * if we're in the middle of a paren thing,
6859 		     * go back to the line that starts it so
6860 		     * we can get the right prevailing indent
6861 		     *	   if ( foo &&
6862 		     *		    bar )
6863 		     */
6864 		    /*
6865 		     * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6866 		     * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6867 		     */
6868 		    (void)find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
6869 		    trypos = find_match_paren(
6870 				 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6871 							      ind_maxcomment);
6872 
6873 		    /*
6874 		     * If we are looking for ',', we also look for matching
6875 		     * braces.
6876 		     */
6877 		    if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6878 			trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6879 
6880 		    if (trypos != NULL)
6881 		    {
6882 			/*
6883 			 * Check if we are on a case label now.  This is
6884 			 * handled above.
6885 			 *     case xx:  if ( asdf &&
6886 			 *			asdf)
6887 			 */
6888 			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
6889 			l = ml_get_curline();
6890 			if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6891 			{
6892 			    ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6893 			    continue;
6894 			}
6895 		    }
6896 
6897 		    /*
6898 		     * Skip over continuation lines to find the one to get the
6899 		     * indent from
6900 		     * char *usethis = "bla\
6901 		     *		 bla",
6902 		     *      here;
6903 		     */
6904 		    if (terminated == ',')
6905 		    {
6906 			while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6907 			{
6908 			    l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6909 			    if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
6910 				break;
6911 			    --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6912 			}
6913 		    }
6914 
6915 		    /*
6916 		     * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
6917 		     * ignoring any jump label.	    XXX
6918 		     */
6919 		    cur_amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
6920 							  &l, ind_maxcomment);
6921 
6922 		    /*
6923 		     * If this is just above the line we are indenting, and it
6924 		     * starts with a '{', line it up with this line.
6925 		     *		while (not)
6926 		     * ->	{
6927 		     *		}
6928 		     */
6929 		    if (terminated != ',' && lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6930 							 && theline[0] == '{')
6931 		    {
6932 			amount = cur_amount;
6933 			/*
6934 			 * Only add ind_open_extra when the current line
6935 			 * doesn't start with a '{', which must have a match
6936 			 * in the same line (scope is the same).  Probably:
6937 			 *	{ 1, 2 },
6938 			 * ->	{ 3, 4 }
6939 			 */
6940 			if (*skipwhite(l) != '{')
6941 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
6942 
6943 			if (ind_cpp_baseclass)
6944 			{
6945 			    /* have to look back, whether it is a cpp base
6946 			     * class declaration or initialization */
6947 			    lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
6948 			    continue;
6949 			}
6950 			break;
6951 		    }
6952 
6953 		    /*
6954 		     * Check if we are after an "if", "while", etc.
6955 		     * Also allow "   } else".
6956 		     */
6957 		    if (cin_is_cinword(l) || cin_iselse(skipwhite(l)))
6958 		    {
6959 			/*
6960 			 * Found an unterminated line after an if (), line up
6961 			 * with the last one.
6962 			 *   if (cond)
6963 			 *	    100 +
6964 			 * ->		here;
6965 			 */
6966 			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6967 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6968 			{
6969 			    if (cont_amount > 0)
6970 				amount = cont_amount;
6971 			    else
6972 				amount += ind_continuation;
6973 			    break;
6974 			}
6975 
6976 			/*
6977 			 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, we
6978 			 * are finished.
6979 			 *	    while (not)
6980 			 * ->		here;
6981 			 * Otherwise this indent can be used when the line
6982 			 * before this is terminated.
6983 			 *	yyy;
6984 			 *	if (stat)
6985 			 *	    while (not)
6986 			 *		xxx;
6987 			 * ->	here;
6988 			 */
6989 			amount = cur_amount;
6990 			if (theline[0] == '{')
6991 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
6992 			if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
6993 			{
6994 			    amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6995 			    break;
6996 			}
6997 
6998 			/*
6999 			 * Special trick: when expecting the while () after a
7000 			 * do, line up with the while()
7001 			 *     do
7002 			 *	    x = 1;
7003 			 * ->  here
7004 			 */
7005 			l = skipwhite(ml_get_curline());
7006 			if (cin_isdo(l))
7007 			{
7008 			    if (whilelevel == 0)
7009 				break;
7010 			    --whilelevel;
7011 			}
7012 
7013 			/*
7014 			 * When searching for a terminated line, don't use the
7015 			 * one between the "if" and the "else".
7016 			 * Need to use the scope of this "else".  XXX
7017 			 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {".
7018 			 */
7019 			if (cin_iselse(l)
7020 				&& whilelevel == 0
7021 				&& ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7022 								    == NULL
7023 				    || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum,
7024 					ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL))
7025 			    break;
7026 		    }
7027 
7028 		    /*
7029 		     * If we're below an unterminated line that is not an
7030 		     * "if" or something, we may line up with this line or
7031 		     * add someting for a continuation line, depending on
7032 		     * the line before this one.
7033 		     */
7034 		    else
7035 		    {
7036 			/*
7037 			 * Found two unterminated lines on a row, line up with
7038 			 * the last one.
7039 			 *   c = 99 +
7040 			 *	    100 +
7041 			 * ->	    here;
7042 			 */
7043 			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
7044 			{
7045 			    /* When line ends in a comma add extra indent */
7046 			    if (terminated == ',')
7047 				amount += ind_continuation;
7048 			    break;
7049 			}
7050 
7051 			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7052 			{
7053 			    /* Found two lines ending in ',', lineup with the
7054 			     * lowest one, but check for cpp base class
7055 			     * declaration/initialization, if it is an
7056 			     * opening brace or we are looking just for
7057 			     * enumerations/initializations. */
7058 			    if (terminated == ',')
7059 			    {
7060 				if (ind_cpp_baseclass == 0)
7061 				    break;
7062 
7063 				lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
7064 				continue;
7065 			    }
7066 
7067 			    /* Ignore unterminated lines in between, but
7068 			     * reduce indent. */
7069 			    if (amount > cur_amount)
7070 				amount = cur_amount;
7071 			}
7072 			else
7073 			{
7074 			    /*
7075 			     * Found first unterminated line on a row, may
7076 			     * line up with this line, remember its indent
7077 			     *	    100 +
7078 			     * ->	    here;
7079 			     */
7080 			    amount = cur_amount;
7081 
7082 			    /*
7083 			     * If previous line ends in ',', check whether we
7084 			     * are in an initialization or enum
7085 			     * struct xxx =
7086 			     * {
7087 			     *      sizeof a,
7088 			     *      124 };
7089 			     * or a normal possible continuation line.
7090 			     * but only, of no other statement has been found
7091 			     * yet.
7092 			     */
7093 			    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL && terminated == ',')
7094 			    {
7095 				lookfor = LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT;
7096 				cont_amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7097 			    }
7098 			    else
7099 			    {
7100 				if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL
7101 					&& *l != NUL
7102 					&& l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7103 								/* XXX */
7104 				    cont_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(
7105 						       curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7106 				if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
7107 				    lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM;
7108 			    }
7109 			}
7110 		    }
7111 		}
7112 
7113 		/*
7114 		 * Check if we are after a while (cond);
7115 		 * If so: Ignore until the matching "do".
7116 		 */
7117 							/* XXX */
7118 		else if (cin_iswhileofdo(l,
7119 					 curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7120 		{
7121 		    /*
7122 		     * Found an unterminated line after a while ();, line up
7123 		     * with the last one.
7124 		     *	    while (cond);
7125 		     *	    100 +		<- line up with this one
7126 		     * ->	    here;
7127 		     */
7128 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7129 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7130 		    {
7131 			if (cont_amount > 0)
7132 			    amount = cont_amount;
7133 			else
7134 			    amount += ind_continuation;
7135 			break;
7136 		    }
7137 
7138 		    if (whilelevel == 0)
7139 		    {
7140 			lookfor = LOOKFOR_TERM;
7141 			amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
7142 			if (theline[0] == '{')
7143 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
7144 		    }
7145 		    ++whilelevel;
7146 		}
7147 
7148 		/*
7149 		 * We are after a "normal" statement.
7150 		 * If we had another statement we can stop now and use the
7151 		 * indent of that other statement.
7152 		 * Otherwise the indent of the current statement may be used,
7153 		 * search backwards for the next "normal" statement.
7154 		 */
7155 		else
7156 		{
7157 		    /*
7158 		     * Skip single break line, if before a switch label. It
7159 		     * may be lined up with the case label.
7160 		     */
7161 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_NOBREAK
7162 				  && cin_isbreak(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
7163 		    {
7164 			lookfor = LOOKFOR_ANY;
7165 			continue;
7166 		    }
7167 
7168 		    /*
7169 		     * Handle "do {" line.
7170 		     */
7171 		    if (whilelevel > 0)
7172 		    {
7173 			l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7174 			if (cin_isdo(l))
7175 			{
7176 			    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
7177 			    --whilelevel;
7178 			    continue;
7179 			}
7180 		    }
7181 
7182 		    /*
7183 		     * Found a terminated line above an unterminated line. Add
7184 		     * the amount for a continuation line.
7185 		     *	 x = 1;
7186 		     *	 y = foo +
7187 		     * ->	here;
7188 		     * or
7189 		     *	 int x = 1;
7190 		     *	 int foo,
7191 		     * ->	here;
7192 		     */
7193 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7194 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7195 		    {
7196 			if (cont_amount > 0)
7197 			    amount = cont_amount;
7198 			else
7199 			    amount += ind_continuation;
7200 			break;
7201 		    }
7202 
7203 		    /*
7204 		     * Found a terminated line above a terminated line or "if"
7205 		     * etc. line. Use the amount of the line below us.
7206 		     *	 x = 1;				x = 1;
7207 		     *	 if (asdf)		    y = 2;
7208 		     *	     while (asdf)	  ->here;
7209 		     *		here;
7210 		     * ->foo;
7211 		     */
7212 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
7213 		    {
7214 			if (!lookfor_break && whilelevel == 0)
7215 			    break;
7216 		    }
7217 
7218 		    /*
7219 		     * First line above the one we're indenting is terminated.
7220 		     * To know what needs to be done look further backward for
7221 		     * a terminated line.
7222 		     */
7223 		    else
7224 		    {
7225 			/*
7226 			 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so
7227 			 * that matching it will take us back to the start of
7228 			 * the line.  Helps for:
7229 			 *     func(asdr,
7230 			 *	      asdfasdf);
7231 			 *     here;
7232 			 */
7233 term_again:
7234 			l = ml_get_curline();
7235 			if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7236 				&& (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7237 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7238 			{
7239 			    /*
7240 			     * Check if we are on a case label now.  This is
7241 			     * handled above.
7242 			     *	   case xx:  if ( asdf &&
7243 			     *			    asdf)
7244 			     */
7245 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7246 			    l = ml_get_curline();
7247 			    if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
7248 			    {
7249 				++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7250 				continue;
7251 			    }
7252 			}
7253 
7254 			/* When aligning with the case statement, don't align
7255 			 * with a statement after it.
7256 			 *  case 1: {   <-- don't use this { position
7257 			 *	stat;
7258 			 *  }
7259 			 *  case 2:
7260 			 *	stat;
7261 			 * }
7262 			 */
7263 			iscase = (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(l));
7264 
7265 			/*
7266 			 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
7267 			 * ignoring any jump label.
7268 			 */
7269 			amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
7270 							  &l, ind_maxcomment);
7271 
7272 			if (theline[0] == '{')
7273 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
7274 			/* See remark above: "Only add ind_open_extra.." */
7275 			if (*skipwhite(l) == '{')
7276 			    amount -= ind_open_extra;
7277 			lookfor = iscase ? LOOKFOR_ANY : LOOKFOR_TERM;
7278 
7279 			/*
7280 			 * If we're at the end of a block, skip to the start of
7281 			 * that block.
7282 			 */
7283 			curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7284 			if (*cin_skipcomment(l) == '}'
7285 				&& (trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7286 							    != NULL) /* XXX */
7287 			{
7288 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7289 			    /* if not "else {" check for terminated again */
7290 			    /* but skip block for "} else {" */
7291 			    l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7292 			    if (*l == '}' || !cin_iselse(l))
7293 				goto term_again;
7294 			    ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7295 			}
7296 		    }
7297 		}
7298 	    }
7299 	}
7300       }
7301 
7302       /* add extra indent for a comment */
7303       if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7304 	  amount += ind_comment;
7305     }
7306 
7307     /*
7308      * ok -- we're not inside any sort of structure at all!
7309      *
7310      * this means we're at the top level, and everything should
7311      * basically just match where the previous line is, except
7312      * for the lines immediately following a function declaration,
7313      * which are K&R-style parameters and need to be indented.
7314      */
7315     else
7316     {
7317 	/*
7318 	 * if our line starts with an open brace, forget about any
7319 	 * prevailing indent and make sure it looks like the start
7320 	 * of a function
7321 	 */
7322 
7323 	if (theline[0] == '{')
7324 	{
7325 	    amount = ind_first_open;
7326 	}
7327 
7328 	/*
7329 	 * If the NEXT line is a function declaration, the current
7330 	 * line needs to be indented as a function type spec.
7331 	 * Don't do this if the current line looks like a comment
7332 	 * or if the current line is terminated, ie. ends in ';'.
7333 	 */
7334 	else if (cur_curpos.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count
7335 		&& !cin_nocode(theline)
7336 		&& !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)":", NULL)
7337 		&& !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7338 		&& cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum + 1)
7339 		&& !cin_isterminated(theline, FALSE, TRUE))
7340 	{
7341 	    amount = ind_func_type;
7342 	}
7343 	else
7344 	{
7345 	    amount = 0;
7346 	    curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7347 
7348 	    /* search backwards until we find something we recognize */
7349 
7350 	    while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7351 	    {
7352 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7353 		curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7354 
7355 		l = ml_get_curline();
7356 
7357 		/*
7358 		 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
7359 		 */						/* XXX */
7360 		if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7361 		{
7362 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
7363 		    continue;
7364 		}
7365 
7366 		/*
7367 		 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or constructor
7368 		 * initialization?
7369 		 */						    /* XXX */
7370 		if (ind_cpp_baseclass != 0 && theline[0] != '{'
7371 					     && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
7372 		{
7373 		    if (col == 0)
7374 		    {
7375 			amount = get_indent() + ind_cpp_baseclass;  /* XXX */
7376 			if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7377 				&& (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7378 					ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7379 			    amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum)
7380 					   + ind_cpp_baseclass;	    /* XXX */
7381 		    }
7382 		    else
7383 		    {
7384 			curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
7385 			getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
7386 			amount = (int)col;
7387 		    }
7388 		    break;
7389 		}
7390 
7391 		/*
7392 		 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
7393 		 */
7394 		if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7395 		    continue;
7396 
7397 		if (cin_nocode(l))
7398 		    continue;
7399 
7400 		/*
7401 		 * If the previous line ends in ',', use one level of
7402 		 * indentation:
7403 		 * int foo,
7404 		 *     bar;
7405 		 * do this before checking for '}' in case of eg.
7406 		 * enum foobar
7407 		 * {
7408 		 *   ...
7409 		 * } foo,
7410 		 *   bar;
7411 		 */
7412 		n = 0;
7413 		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7414 			     || (*l != NUL && (n = l[STRLEN(l) - 1]) == '\\'))
7415 		{
7416 		    /* take us back to opening paren */
7417 		    if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7418 			    && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7419 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7420 			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7421 
7422 		    /* For a line ending in ',' that is a continuation line go
7423 		     * back to the first line with a backslash:
7424 		     * char *foo = "bla\
7425 		     *		 bla",
7426 		     *      here;
7427 		     */
7428 		    while (n == 0 && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7429 		    {
7430 			l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7431 			if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
7432 			    break;
7433 			--curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7434 		    }
7435 
7436 		    amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
7437 
7438 		    if (amount == 0)
7439 			amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7440 		    if (amount == 0)
7441 			amount = ind_continuation;
7442 		    break;
7443 		}
7444 
7445 		/*
7446 		 * If the line looks like a function declaration, and we're
7447 		 * not in a comment, put it the left margin.
7448 		 */
7449 		if (cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum))  /* XXX */
7450 		    break;
7451 		l = ml_get_curline();
7452 
7453 		/*
7454 		 * Finding the closing '}' of a previous function.  Put
7455 		 * current line at the left margin.  For when 'cino' has "fs".
7456 		 */
7457 		if (*skipwhite(l) == '}')
7458 		    break;
7459 
7460 		/*			    (matching {)
7461 		 * If the previous line ends on '};' (maybe followed by
7462 		 * comments) align at column 0.  For example:
7463 		 * char *string_array[] = { "foo",
7464 		 *     / * x * / "b};ar" }; / * foobar * /
7465 		 */
7466 		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"};", NULL))
7467 		    break;
7468 
7469 		/*
7470 		 * If the PREVIOUS line is a function declaration, the current
7471 		 * line (and the ones that follow) needs to be indented as
7472 		 * parameters.
7473 		 */
7474 		if (cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7475 		{
7476 		    amount = ind_param;
7477 		    break;
7478 		}
7479 
7480 		/*
7481 		 * If the previous line ends in ';' and the line before the
7482 		 * previous line ends in ',' or '\', ident to column zero:
7483 		 * int foo,
7484 		 *     bar;
7485 		 * indent_to_0 here;
7486 		 */
7487 		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u*)";", NULL))
7488 		{
7489 		    l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7490 		    if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7491 			    || (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\'))
7492 			break;
7493 		    l = ml_get_curline();
7494 		}
7495 
7496 		/*
7497 		 * Doesn't look like anything interesting -- so just
7498 		 * use the indent of this line.
7499 		 *
7500 		 * Position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
7501 		 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
7502 		 */
7503 		find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
7504 
7505 		if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7506 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7507 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7508 		amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
7509 		break;
7510 	    }
7511 
7512 	    /* add extra indent for a comment */
7513 	    if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7514 		amount += ind_comment;
7515 
7516 	    /* add extra indent if the previous line ended in a backslash:
7517 	     *	      "asdfasdf\
7518 	     *		  here";
7519 	     *	    char *foo = "asdf\
7520 	     *			 here";
7521 	     */
7522 	    if (cur_curpos.lnum > 1)
7523 	    {
7524 		l = ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7525 		if (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7526 		{
7527 		    cur_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7528 		    if (cur_amount > 0)
7529 			amount = cur_amount;
7530 		    else if (cur_amount == 0)
7531 			amount += ind_continuation;
7532 		}
7533 	    }
7534 	}
7535     }
7536 
7537 theend:
7538     /* put the cursor back where it belongs */
7539     curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7540 
7541     vim_free(linecopy);
7542 
7543     if (amount < 0)
7544 	return 0;
7545     return amount;
7546 }
7547 
7548     static int
7549 find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)
7550     int		lookfor;
7551     linenr_T	ourscope;
7552     int		ind_maxparen;
7553     int		ind_maxcomment;
7554 {
7555     char_u	*look;
7556     pos_T	*theirscope;
7557     char_u	*mightbeif;
7558     int		elselevel;
7559     int		whilelevel;
7560 
7561     if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7562     {
7563 	elselevel = 1;
7564 	whilelevel = 0;
7565     }
7566     else
7567     {
7568 	elselevel = 0;
7569 	whilelevel = 1;
7570     }
7571 
7572     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7573 
7574     while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > ourscope + 1)
7575     {
7576 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7577 	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7578 
7579 	look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7580 	if (cin_iselse(look)
7581 		|| cin_isif(look)
7582 		|| cin_isdo(look)			    /* XXX */
7583 		|| cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7584 	{
7585 	    /*
7586 	     * if we've gone outside the braces entirely,
7587 	     * we must be out of scope...
7588 	     */
7589 	    theirscope = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);  /* XXX */
7590 	    if (theirscope == NULL)
7591 		break;
7592 
7593 	    /*
7594 	     * and if the brace enclosing this is further
7595 	     * back than the one enclosing the else, we're
7596 	     * out of luck too.
7597 	     */
7598 	    if (theirscope->lnum < ourscope)
7599 		break;
7600 
7601 	    /*
7602 	     * and if they're enclosed in a *deeper* brace,
7603 	     * then we can ignore it because it's in a
7604 	     * different scope...
7605 	     */
7606 	    if (theirscope->lnum > ourscope)
7607 		continue;
7608 
7609 	    /*
7610 	     * if it was an "else" (that's not an "else if")
7611 	     * then we need to go back to another if, so
7612 	     * increment elselevel
7613 	     */
7614 	    look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7615 	    if (cin_iselse(look))
7616 	    {
7617 		mightbeif = cin_skipcomment(look + 4);
7618 		if (!cin_isif(mightbeif))
7619 		    ++elselevel;
7620 		continue;
7621 	    }
7622 
7623 	    /*
7624 	     * if it was a "while" then we need to go back to
7625 	     * another "do", so increment whilelevel.  XXX
7626 	     */
7627 	    if (cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7628 	    {
7629 		++whilelevel;
7630 		continue;
7631 	    }
7632 
7633 	    /* If it's an "if" decrement elselevel */
7634 	    look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7635 	    if (cin_isif(look))
7636 	    {
7637 		elselevel--;
7638 		/*
7639 		 * When looking for an "if" ignore "while"s that
7640 		 * get in the way.
7641 		 */
7642 		if (elselevel == 0 && lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7643 		    whilelevel = 0;
7644 	    }
7645 
7646 	    /* If it's a "do" decrement whilelevel */
7647 	    if (cin_isdo(look))
7648 		whilelevel--;
7649 
7650 	    /*
7651 	     * if we've used up all the elses, then
7652 	     * this must be the if that we want!
7653 	     * match the indent level of that if.
7654 	     */
7655 	    if (elselevel <= 0 && whilelevel <= 0)
7656 	    {
7657 		return OK;
7658 	    }
7659 	}
7660     }
7661     return FAIL;
7662 }
7663 
7664 # if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
7665 /*
7666  * Get indent level from 'indentexpr'.
7667  */
7668     int
7669 get_expr_indent()
7670 {
7671     int		indent;
7672     pos_T	pos;
7673     int		save_State;
7674 
7675     pos = curwin->w_cursor;
7676     set_vim_var_nr(VV_LNUM, curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7677     ++sandbox;
7678     indent = eval_to_number(curbuf->b_p_inde);
7679     --sandbox;
7680 
7681     /* Restore the cursor position so that 'indentexpr' doesn't need to.
7682      * Pretend to be in Insert mode, allow cursor past end of line for "o"
7683      * command. */
7684     save_State = State;
7685     State = INSERT;
7686     curwin->w_cursor = pos;
7687     check_cursor();
7688     State = save_State;
7689 
7690     /* If there is an error, just keep the current indent. */
7691     if (indent < 0)
7692 	indent = get_indent();
7693 
7694     return indent;
7695 }
7696 # endif
7697 
7698 #endif /* FEAT_CINDENT */
7699 
7700 #if defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(PROTO)
7701 
7702 static int lisp_match __ARGS((char_u *p));
7703 
7704     static int
7705 lisp_match(p)
7706     char_u	*p;
7707 {
7708     char_u	buf[LSIZE];
7709     int		len;
7710     char_u	*word = p_lispwords;
7711 
7712     while (*word != NUL)
7713     {
7714 	(void)copy_option_part(&word, buf, LSIZE, ",");
7715 	len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
7716 	if (STRNCMP(buf, p, len) == 0 && p[len] == ' ')
7717 	    return TRUE;
7718     }
7719     return FALSE;
7720 }
7721 
7722 /*
7723  * When 'p' is present in 'cpoptions, a Vi compatible method is used.
7724  * The incompatible newer method is quite a bit better at indenting
7725  * code in lisp-like languages than the traditional one; it's still
7726  * mostly heuristics however -- Dirk van Deun, [email protected]
7727  *
7728  * TODO:
7729  * Findmatch() should be adapted for lisp, also to make showmatch
7730  * work correctly: now (v5.3) it seems all C/C++ oriented:
7731  * - it does not recognize the #\( and #\) notations as character literals
7732  * - it doesn't know about comments starting with a semicolon
7733  * - it incorrectly interprets '(' as a character literal
7734  * All this messes up get_lisp_indent in some rare cases.
7735  * Update from Sergey Khorev:
7736  * I tried to fix the first two issues.
7737  */
7738     int
7739 get_lisp_indent()
7740 {
7741     pos_T	*pos, realpos, paren;
7742     int		amount;
7743     char_u	*that;
7744     colnr_T	col;
7745     colnr_T	firsttry;
7746     int		parencount, quotecount;
7747     int		vi_lisp;
7748 
7749     /* Set vi_lisp to use the vi-compatible method */
7750     vi_lisp = (vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISP) != NULL);
7751 
7752     realpos = curwin->w_cursor;
7753     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7754 
7755     if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) == NULL)
7756 	pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7757     else
7758     {
7759 	paren = *pos;
7760 	pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7761 	if (pos == NULL || ltp(pos, &paren))
7762 	    pos = &paren;
7763     }
7764     if (pos != NULL)
7765     {
7766 	/* Extra trick: Take the indent of the first previous non-white
7767 	 * line that is at the same () level. */
7768 	amount = -1;
7769 	parencount = 0;
7770 
7771 	while (--curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= pos->lnum)
7772 	{
7773 	    if (linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7774 		continue;
7775 	    for (that = ml_get_curline(); *that != NUL; ++that)
7776 	    {
7777 		if (*that == ';')
7778 		{
7779 		    while (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7780 			++that;
7781 		    continue;
7782 		}
7783 		if (*that == '\\')
7784 		{
7785 		    if (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7786 			++that;
7787 		    continue;
7788 		}
7789 		if (*that == '"' && *(that + 1) != NUL)
7790 		{
7791 		    that++;
7792 		    while (*that && (*that != '"' || *(that - 1) == '\\'))
7793 			++that;
7794 		}
7795 		if (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7796 		    ++parencount;
7797 		else if (*that == ')' || *that == ']')
7798 		    --parencount;
7799 	    }
7800 	    if (parencount == 0)
7801 	    {
7802 		amount = get_indent();
7803 		break;
7804 	    }
7805 	}
7806 
7807 	if (amount == -1)
7808 	{
7809 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
7810 	    curwin->w_cursor.col = pos->col;
7811 	    col = pos->col;
7812 
7813 	    that = ml_get_curline();
7814 
7815 	    if (vi_lisp && get_indent() == 0)
7816 		amount = 2;
7817 	    else
7818 	    {
7819 		amount = 0;
7820 		while (*that && col)
7821 		{
7822 		    amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, (colnr_T)amount);
7823 		    col--;
7824 		}
7825 
7826 		/*
7827 		 * Some keywords require "body" indenting rules (the
7828 		 * non-standard-lisp ones are Scheme special forms):
7829 		 *
7830 		 * (let ((a 1))    instead    (let ((a 1))
7831 		 *   (...))	      of	   (...))
7832 		 */
7833 
7834 		if (!vi_lisp && (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7835 						      && lisp_match(that + 1))
7836 		    amount += 2;
7837 		else
7838 		{
7839 		    that++;
7840 		    amount++;
7841 		    firsttry = amount;
7842 
7843 		    while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7844 		    {
7845 			amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7846 			++that;
7847 		    }
7848 
7849 		    if (*that && *that != ';') /* not a comment line */
7850 		    {
7851 			/* test *that != '(' to accomodate first let/do
7852 			 * argument if it is more than one line */
7853 			if (!vi_lisp && *that != '(' && *that != '[')
7854 			    firsttry++;
7855 
7856 			parencount = 0;
7857 			quotecount = 0;
7858 
7859 			if (vi_lisp
7860 				|| (*that != '"'
7861 				    && *that != '\''
7862 				    && *that != '#'
7863 				    && (*that < '0' || *that > '9')))
7864 			{
7865 			    while (*that
7866 				    && (!vim_iswhite(*that)
7867 					|| quotecount
7868 					|| parencount)
7869 				    && (!((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7870 					    && !quotecount
7871 					    && !parencount
7872 					    && vi_lisp)))
7873 			    {
7874 				if (*that == '"')
7875 				    quotecount = !quotecount;
7876 				if ((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7877 							       && !quotecount)
7878 				    ++parencount;
7879 				if ((*that == ')' || *that == ']')
7880 							       && !quotecount)
7881 				    --parencount;
7882 				if (*that == '\\' && *(that+1) != NUL)
7883 				    amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7884 							     (colnr_T)amount);
7885 				amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7886 							     (colnr_T)amount);
7887 			    }
7888 			}
7889 			while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7890 			{
7891 			    amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7892 			    that++;
7893 			}
7894 			if (!*that || *that == ';')
7895 			    amount = firsttry;
7896 		    }
7897 		}
7898 	    }
7899 	}
7900     }
7901     else
7902 	amount = 0;	/* no matching '(' or '[' found, use zero indent */
7903 
7904     curwin->w_cursor = realpos;
7905 
7906     return amount;
7907 }
7908 #endif /* FEAT_LISP */
7909 
7910     void
7911 prepare_to_exit()
7912 {
7913 #if defined(SIGHUP) && defined(SIG_IGN)
7914     /* Ignore SIGHUP, because a dropped connection causes a read error, which
7915      * makes Vim exit and then handling SIGHUP causes various reentrance
7916      * problems. */
7917     signal(SIGHUP, SIG_IGN);
7918 #endif
7919 
7920 #ifdef FEAT_GUI
7921     if (gui.in_use)
7922     {
7923 	gui.dying = TRUE;
7924 	out_trash();	/* trash any pending output */
7925     }
7926     else
7927 #endif
7928     {
7929 	windgoto((int)Rows - 1, 0);
7930 
7931 	/*
7932 	 * Switch terminal mode back now, so messages end up on the "normal"
7933 	 * screen (if there are two screens).
7934 	 */
7935 	settmode(TMODE_COOK);
7936 #ifdef WIN3264
7937 	if (can_end_termcap_mode(FALSE) == TRUE)
7938 #endif
7939 	    stoptermcap();
7940 	out_flush();
7941     }
7942 }
7943 
7944 /*
7945  * Preserve files and exit.
7946  * When called IObuff must contain a message.
7947  */
7948     void
7949 preserve_exit()
7950 {
7951     buf_T	*buf;
7952 
7953     prepare_to_exit();
7954 
7955     out_str(IObuff);
7956     screen_start();		    /* don't know where cursor is now */
7957     out_flush();
7958 
7959     ml_close_notmod();		    /* close all not-modified buffers */
7960 
7961     for (buf = firstbuf; buf != NULL; buf = buf->b_next)
7962     {
7963 	if (buf->b_ml.ml_mfp != NULL && buf->b_ml.ml_mfp->mf_fname != NULL)
7964 	{
7965 	    OUT_STR(_("Vim: preserving files...\n"));
7966 	    screen_start();	    /* don't know where cursor is now */
7967 	    out_flush();
7968 	    ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE);	/* preserve all swap files */
7969 	    break;
7970 	}
7971     }
7972 
7973     ml_close_all(FALSE);	    /* close all memfiles, without deleting */
7974 
7975     OUT_STR(_("Vim: Finished.\n"));
7976 
7977     getout(1);
7978 }
7979 
7980 /*
7981  * return TRUE if "fname" exists.
7982  */
7983     int
7984 vim_fexists(fname)
7985     char_u  *fname;
7986 {
7987     struct stat st;
7988 
7989     if (mch_stat((char *)fname, &st))
7990 	return FALSE;
7991     return TRUE;
7992 }
7993 
7994 /*
7995  * Check for CTRL-C pressed, but only once in a while.
7996  * Should be used instead of ui_breakcheck() for functions that check for
7997  * each line in the file.  Calling ui_breakcheck() each time takes too much
7998  * time, because it can be a system call.
7999  */
8000 
8001 #ifndef BREAKCHECK_SKIP
8002 # ifdef FEAT_GUI		    /* assume the GUI only runs on fast computers */
8003 #  define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 200
8004 # else
8005 #  define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 32
8006 # endif
8007 #endif
8008 
8009 static int	breakcheck_count = 0;
8010 
8011     void
8012 line_breakcheck()
8013 {
8014     if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP)
8015     {
8016 	breakcheck_count = 0;
8017 	ui_breakcheck();
8018     }
8019 }
8020 
8021 /*
8022  * Like line_breakcheck() but check 10 times less often.
8023  */
8024     void
8025 fast_breakcheck()
8026 {
8027     if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP * 10)
8028     {
8029 	breakcheck_count = 0;
8030 	ui_breakcheck();
8031     }
8032 }
8033 
8034 /*
8035  * Expand wildcards.  Calls gen_expand_wildcards() and removes files matching
8036  * 'wildignore'.
8037  */
8038     int
8039 expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
8040     int		   num_pat;	/* number of input patterns */
8041     char_u	 **pat;		/* array of input patterns */
8042     int		  *num_file;	/* resulting number of files */
8043     char_u	***file;	/* array of resulting files */
8044     int		   flags;	/* EW_DIR, etc. */
8045 {
8046     int		retval;
8047     int		i, j;
8048     char_u	*p;
8049     int		non_suf_match;	/* number without matching suffix */
8050 
8051     retval = gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8052 
8053     /* When keeping all matches, return here */
8054     if (flags & EW_KEEPALL)
8055 	return retval;
8056 
8057 #ifdef FEAT_WILDIGN
8058     /*
8059      * Remove names that match 'wildignore'.
8060      */
8061     if (*p_wig)
8062     {
8063 	char_u	*ffname;
8064 
8065 	/* check all files in (*file)[] */
8066 	for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
8067 	{
8068 	    ffname = FullName_save((*file)[i], FALSE);
8069 	    if (ffname == NULL)		/* out of memory */
8070 		break;
8071 # ifdef VMS
8072 	    vms_remove_version(ffname);
8073 # endif
8074 	    if (match_file_list(p_wig, (*file)[i], ffname))
8075 	    {
8076 		/* remove this matching file from the list */
8077 		vim_free((*file)[i]);
8078 		for (j = i; j + 1 < *num_file; ++j)
8079 		    (*file)[j] = (*file)[j + 1];
8080 		--*num_file;
8081 		--i;
8082 	    }
8083 	    vim_free(ffname);
8084 	}
8085     }
8086 #endif
8087 
8088     /*
8089      * Move the names where 'suffixes' match to the end.
8090      */
8091     if (*num_file > 1)
8092     {
8093 	non_suf_match = 0;
8094 	for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
8095 	{
8096 	    if (!match_suffix((*file)[i]))
8097 	    {
8098 		/*
8099 		 * Move the name without matching suffix to the front
8100 		 * of the list.
8101 		 */
8102 		p = (*file)[i];
8103 		for (j = i; j > non_suf_match; --j)
8104 		    (*file)[j] = (*file)[j - 1];
8105 		(*file)[non_suf_match++] = p;
8106 	    }
8107 	}
8108     }
8109 
8110     return retval;
8111 }
8112 
8113 /*
8114  * Return TRUE if "fname" matches with an entry in 'suffixes'.
8115  */
8116     int
8117 match_suffix(fname)
8118     char_u	*fname;
8119 {
8120     int		fnamelen, setsuflen;
8121     char_u	*setsuf;
8122 #define MAXSUFLEN 30	    /* maximum length of a file suffix */
8123     char_u	suf_buf[MAXSUFLEN];
8124 
8125     fnamelen = (int)STRLEN(fname);
8126     setsuflen = 0;
8127     for (setsuf = p_su; *setsuf; )
8128     {
8129 	setsuflen = copy_option_part(&setsuf, suf_buf, MAXSUFLEN, ".,");
8130 	if (fnamelen >= setsuflen
8131 		&& fnamencmp(suf_buf, fname + fnamelen - setsuflen,
8132 					      (size_t)setsuflen) == 0)
8133 	    break;
8134 	setsuflen = 0;
8135     }
8136     return (setsuflen != 0);
8137 }
8138 
8139 #if !defined(NO_EXPANDPATH) || defined(PROTO)
8140 
8141 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8142 static int vim_backtick __ARGS((char_u *p));
8143 static int expand_backtick __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *pat, int flags));
8144 # endif
8145 
8146 # if defined(MSDOS) || defined(FEAT_GUI_W16) || defined(WIN3264)
8147 /*
8148  * File name expansion code for MS-DOS, Win16 and Win32.  It's here because
8149  * it's shared between these systems.
8150  */
8151 # if defined(DJGPP) || defined(PROTO)
8152 #  define _cdecl	    /* DJGPP doesn't have this */
8153 # else
8154 #  ifdef __BORLANDC__
8155 #   define _cdecl _RTLENTRYF
8156 #  endif
8157 # endif
8158 
8159 /*
8160  * comparison function for qsort in dos_expandpath()
8161  */
8162     static int _cdecl
8163 pstrcmp(const void *a, const void *b)
8164 {
8165     return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1));
8166 }
8167 
8168 # ifndef WIN3264
8169     static void
8170 namelowcpy(
8171     char_u *d,
8172     char_u *s)
8173 {
8174 #  ifdef DJGPP
8175     if (USE_LONG_FNAME)	    /* don't lower case on Windows 95/NT systems */
8176 	while (*s)
8177 	    *d++ = *s++;
8178     else
8179 #  endif
8180 	while (*s)
8181 	    *d++ = TOLOWER_LOC(*s++);
8182     *d = NUL;
8183 }
8184 # endif
8185 
8186 /*
8187  * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or
8188  * directories.  Adds matches to "gap".  Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc.
8189  * Return the number of matches found.
8190  * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
8191  * at "path[wildoff]".
8192  * Return the number of matches found.
8193  * NOTE: much of this is identical to unix_expandpath(), keep in sync!
8194  */
8195     static int
8196 dos_expandpath(
8197     garray_T	*gap,
8198     char_u	*path,
8199     int		wildoff,
8200     int		flags,		/* EW_* flags */
8201     int		didstar)	/* expaneded "**" once already */
8202 {
8203     char_u	*buf;
8204     char_u	*path_end;
8205     char_u	*p, *s, *e;
8206     int		start_len = gap->ga_len;
8207     char_u	*pat;
8208     regmatch_T	regmatch;
8209     int		starts_with_dot;
8210     int		matches;
8211     int		len;
8212     int		starstar = FALSE;
8213     static int	stardepth = 0;	    /* depth for "**" expansion */
8214 #ifdef WIN3264
8215     WIN32_FIND_DATA	fb;
8216     HANDLE		hFind = (HANDLE)0;
8217 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8218     WIN32_FIND_DATAW    wfb;
8219     WCHAR		*wn = NULL;	/* UCS-2 name, NULL when not used. */
8220 # endif
8221 #else
8222     struct ffblk	fb;
8223 #endif
8224     char_u		*matchname;
8225     int			ok;
8226 
8227     /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */
8228     if (stardepth > 0)
8229     {
8230 	ui_breakcheck();
8231 	if (got_int)
8232 	    return 0;
8233     }
8234 
8235     /* make room for file name */
8236     buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
8237     if (buf == NULL)
8238 	return 0;
8239 
8240     /*
8241      * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard or a ~1.
8242      * Copy it into buf, including the preceding characters.
8243      */
8244     p = buf;
8245     s = buf;
8246     e = NULL;
8247     path_end = path;
8248     while (*path_end != NUL)
8249     {
8250 	/* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
8251 	 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
8252 	if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
8253 	    *p++ = *path_end++;
8254 	else if (*path_end == '\\' || *path_end == ':' || *path_end == '/')
8255 	{
8256 	    if (e != NULL)
8257 		break;
8258 	    s = p + 1;
8259 	}
8260 	else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
8261 			 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[~", *path_end) != NULL)
8262 	    e = p;
8263 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8264 	if (has_mbyte)
8265 	{
8266 	    len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end);
8267 	    STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
8268 	    p += len;
8269 	    path_end += len;
8270 	}
8271 	else
8272 #endif
8273 	    *p++ = *path_end++;
8274     }
8275     e = p;
8276     *e = NUL;
8277 
8278     /* now we have one wildcard component between s and e */
8279     /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
8280      * component. */
8281     for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
8282 	if (rem_backslash(p))
8283 	{
8284 	    STRCPY(p, p + 1);
8285 	    --e;
8286 	    --s;
8287 	}
8288 
8289     /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */
8290     for (p = s; p < e; ++p)
8291 	if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*')
8292 	    starstar = TRUE;
8293 
8294     starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
8295     pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
8296     if (pat == NULL)
8297     {
8298 	vim_free(buf);
8299 	return 0;
8300     }
8301 
8302     /* compile the regexp into a program */
8303     regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE;		/* Always ignore case */
8304     regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
8305     vim_free(pat);
8306 
8307     if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
8308     {
8309 	vim_free(buf);
8310 	return 0;
8311     }
8312 
8313     /* remember the pattern or file name being looked for */
8314     matchname = vim_strsave(s);
8315 
8316     /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more
8317      * is following then find matches without any directory. */
8318     if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2
8319 							  && *path_end == '/')
8320     {
8321 	STRCPY(s, path_end + 1);
8322 	++stardepth;
8323 	(void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE);
8324 	--stardepth;
8325     }
8326 
8327     /* Scan all files in the directory with "dir/ *.*" */
8328     STRCPY(s, "*.*");
8329 #ifdef WIN3264
8330 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8331     if (enc_codepage >= 0 && (int)GetACP() != enc_codepage)
8332     {
8333 	/* The active codepage differs from 'encoding'.  Attempt using the
8334 	 * wide function.  If it fails because it is not implemented fall back
8335 	 * to the non-wide version (for Windows 98) */
8336 	wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8337 	if (wn != NULL)
8338 	{
8339 	    hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8340 	    if (hFind == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE
8341 			      && GetLastError() == ERROR_CALL_NOT_IMPLEMENTED)
8342 	    {
8343 		vim_free(wn);
8344 		wn = NULL;
8345 	    }
8346 	}
8347     }
8348 
8349     if (wn == NULL)
8350 # endif
8351 	hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8352     ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8353 #else
8354     /* If we are expanding wildcards we try both files and directories */
8355     ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8356 		(*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8357 #endif
8358 
8359     while (ok)
8360     {
8361 #ifdef WIN3264
8362 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8363 	if (wn != NULL)
8364 	    p = ucs2_to_enc(wfb.cFileName, NULL);   /* p is allocated here */
8365 	else
8366 # endif
8367 	    p = (char_u *)fb.cFileName;
8368 #else
8369 	p = (char_u *)fb.ff_name;
8370 #endif
8371 	/* Ignore entries starting with a dot, unless when asked for.  Accept
8372 	 * all entries found with "matchname". */
8373 	if ((p[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
8374 		&& (matchname == NULL
8375 		    || vim_regexec(&regmatch, p, (colnr_T)0)))
8376 	{
8377 #ifdef WIN3264
8378 	    STRCPY(s, p);
8379 #else
8380 	    namelowcpy(s, p);
8381 #endif
8382 	    len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
8383 
8384 	    if (starstar && stardepth < 100)
8385 	    {
8386 		/* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to
8387 		 * find matches. */
8388 		STRCPY(buf + len, "/**");
8389 		STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end);
8390 		++stardepth;
8391 		(void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE);
8392 		--stardepth;
8393 	    }
8394 
8395 	    STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
8396 	    if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end))
8397 	    {
8398 		/* need to expand another component of the path */
8399 		/* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8400 		(void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE);
8401 	    }
8402 	    else
8403 	    {
8404 		/* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
8405 		/* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8406 		if (*path_end != 0)
8407 		    backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
8408 		if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0)	/* add existing file */
8409 		    addfile(gap, buf, flags);
8410 	    }
8411 	}
8412 
8413 #ifdef WIN3264
8414 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8415 	if (wn != NULL)
8416 	{
8417 	    vim_free(p);
8418 	    ok = FindNextFileW(hFind, &wfb);
8419 	}
8420 	else
8421 # endif
8422 	    ok = FindNextFile(hFind, &fb);
8423 #else
8424 	ok = (findnext(&fb) == 0);
8425 #endif
8426 
8427 	/* If no more matches and no match was used, try expanding the name
8428 	 * itself.  Finds the long name of a short filename. */
8429 	if (!ok && matchname != NULL && gap->ga_len == start_len)
8430 	{
8431 	    STRCPY(s, matchname);
8432 #ifdef WIN3264
8433 	    FindClose(hFind);
8434 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8435 	    if (wn != NULL)
8436 	    {
8437 		vim_free(wn);
8438 		wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8439 		if (wn != NULL)
8440 		    hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8441 	    }
8442 	    if (wn == NULL)
8443 # endif
8444 		hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8445 	    ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8446 #else
8447 	    ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8448 		 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8449 #endif
8450 	    vim_free(matchname);
8451 	    matchname = NULL;
8452 	}
8453     }
8454 
8455 #ifdef WIN3264
8456     FindClose(hFind);
8457 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8458     vim_free(wn);
8459 # endif
8460 #endif
8461     vim_free(buf);
8462     vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
8463     vim_free(matchname);
8464 
8465     matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
8466     if (matches > 0)
8467 	qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, (size_t)matches,
8468 						   sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
8469     return matches;
8470 }
8471 
8472     int
8473 mch_expandpath(
8474     garray_T	*gap,
8475     char_u	*path,
8476     int		flags)		/* EW_* flags */
8477 {
8478     return dos_expandpath(gap, path, 0, flags, FALSE);
8479 }
8480 # endif /* MSDOS || FEAT_GUI_W16 || WIN3264 */
8481 
8482 #if (defined(UNIX) && !defined(VMS)) || defined(USE_UNIXFILENAME) \
8483 	|| defined(PROTO)
8484 /*
8485  * Unix style wildcard expansion code.
8486  * It's here because it's used both for Unix and Mac.
8487  */
8488 static int	pstrcmp __ARGS((const void *, const void *));
8489 
8490     static int
8491 pstrcmp(a, b)
8492     const void *a, *b;
8493 {
8494     return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1));
8495 }
8496 
8497 /*
8498  * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or
8499  * directories.  Adds matches to "gap".  Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc.
8500  * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
8501  * at "path + wildoff".
8502  * Return the number of matches found.
8503  * NOTE: much of this is identical to dos_expandpath(), keep in sync!
8504  */
8505     int
8506 unix_expandpath(gap, path, wildoff, flags, didstar)
8507     garray_T	*gap;
8508     char_u	*path;
8509     int		wildoff;
8510     int		flags;		/* EW_* flags */
8511     int		didstar;	/* expanded "**" once already */
8512 {
8513     char_u	*buf;
8514     char_u	*path_end;
8515     char_u	*p, *s, *e;
8516     int		start_len = gap->ga_len;
8517     char_u	*pat;
8518     regmatch_T	regmatch;
8519     int		starts_with_dot;
8520     int		matches;
8521     int		len;
8522     int		starstar = FALSE;
8523     static int	stardepth = 0;	    /* depth for "**" expansion */
8524 
8525     DIR		*dirp;
8526     struct dirent *dp;
8527 
8528     /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */
8529     if (stardepth > 0)
8530     {
8531 	ui_breakcheck();
8532 	if (got_int)
8533 	    return 0;
8534     }
8535 
8536     /* make room for file name */
8537     buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
8538     if (buf == NULL)
8539 	return 0;
8540 
8541     /*
8542      * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard.
8543      * Copy it into "buf", including the preceding characters.
8544      */
8545     p = buf;
8546     s = buf;
8547     e = NULL;
8548     path_end = path;
8549     while (*path_end != NUL)
8550     {
8551 	/* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
8552 	 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
8553 	if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
8554 	    *p++ = *path_end++;
8555 	else if (*path_end == '/')
8556 	{
8557 	    if (e != NULL)
8558 		break;
8559 	    s = p + 1;
8560 	}
8561 	else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
8562 			 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[{~$", *path_end) != NULL)
8563 	    e = p;
8564 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8565 	if (has_mbyte)
8566 	{
8567 	    len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end);
8568 	    STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
8569 	    p += len;
8570 	    path_end += len;
8571 	}
8572 	else
8573 #endif
8574 	    *p++ = *path_end++;
8575     }
8576     e = p;
8577     *e = NUL;
8578 
8579     /* now we have one wildcard component between "s" and "e" */
8580     /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
8581      * component. */
8582     for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
8583 	if (rem_backslash(p))
8584 	{
8585 	    STRCPY(p, p + 1);
8586 	    --e;
8587 	    --s;
8588 	}
8589 
8590     /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */
8591     for (p = s; p < e; ++p)
8592 	if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*')
8593 	    starstar = TRUE;
8594 
8595     /* convert the file pattern to a regexp pattern */
8596     starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
8597     pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
8598     if (pat == NULL)
8599     {
8600 	vim_free(buf);
8601 	return 0;
8602     }
8603 
8604     /* compile the regexp into a program */
8605 #ifdef CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME
8606     regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE;		/* Behave like Terminal.app */
8607 #else
8608     regmatch.rm_ic = FALSE;		/* Don't ever ignore case */
8609 #endif
8610     regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
8611     vim_free(pat);
8612 
8613     if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
8614     {
8615 	vim_free(buf);
8616 	return 0;
8617     }
8618 
8619     /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more
8620      * is following then find matches without any directory. */
8621     if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2
8622 							  && *path_end == '/')
8623     {
8624 	STRCPY(s, path_end + 1);
8625 	++stardepth;
8626 	(void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE);
8627 	--stardepth;
8628     }
8629 
8630     /* open the directory for scanning */
8631     *s = NUL;
8632     dirp = opendir(*buf == NUL ? "." : (char *)buf);
8633 
8634     /* Find all matching entries */
8635     if (dirp != NULL)
8636     {
8637 	for (;;)
8638 	{
8639 	    dp = readdir(dirp);
8640 	    if (dp == NULL)
8641 		break;
8642 	    if ((dp->d_name[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
8643 		    && vim_regexec(&regmatch, (char_u *)dp->d_name, (colnr_T)0))
8644 	    {
8645 		STRCPY(s, dp->d_name);
8646 		len = STRLEN(buf);
8647 
8648 		if (starstar && stardepth < 100)
8649 		{
8650 		    /* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to
8651 		     * find matches. */
8652 		    STRCPY(buf + len, "/**");
8653 		    STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end);
8654 		    ++stardepth;
8655 		    (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE);
8656 		    --stardepth;
8657 		}
8658 
8659 		STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
8660 		if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end)) /* handle more wildcards */
8661 		{
8662 		    /* need to expand another component of the path */
8663 		    /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8664 		    (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE);
8665 		}
8666 		else
8667 		{
8668 		    /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
8669 		    /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8670 		    if (*path_end != NUL)
8671 			backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
8672 		    if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0)	/* add existing file */
8673 		    {
8674 #if defined(MACOS_X) && defined(FEAT_MBYTE)
8675 			size_t precomp_len = STRLEN(buf)+1;
8676 			char_u *precomp_buf =
8677 			    mac_precompose_path(buf, precomp_len, &precomp_len);
8678 			if (precomp_buf)
8679 			{
8680 			    mch_memmove(buf, precomp_buf, precomp_len);
8681 			    vim_free(precomp_buf);
8682 			}
8683 #endif
8684 			addfile(gap, buf, flags);
8685 		    }
8686 		}
8687 	    }
8688 	}
8689 
8690 	closedir(dirp);
8691     }
8692 
8693     vim_free(buf);
8694     vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
8695 
8696     matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
8697     if (matches > 0)
8698 	qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, matches,
8699 						   sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
8700     return matches;
8701 }
8702 #endif
8703 
8704 /*
8705  * Generic wildcard expansion code.
8706  *
8707  * Characters in "pat" that should not be expanded must be preceded with a
8708  * backslash. E.g., "/path\ with\ spaces/my\*star*"
8709  *
8710  * Return FAIL when no single file was found.  In this case "num_file" is not
8711  * set, and "file" may contain an error message.
8712  * Return OK when some files found.  "num_file" is set to the number of
8713  * matches, "file" to the array of matches.  Call FreeWild() later.
8714  */
8715     int
8716 gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
8717     int		num_pat;	/* number of input patterns */
8718     char_u	**pat;		/* array of input patterns */
8719     int		*num_file;	/* resulting number of files */
8720     char_u	***file;	/* array of resulting files */
8721     int		flags;		/* EW_* flags */
8722 {
8723     int			i;
8724     garray_T		ga;
8725     char_u		*p;
8726     static int		recursive = FALSE;
8727     int			add_pat;
8728 
8729     /*
8730      * expand_env() is called to expand things like "~user".  If this fails,
8731      * it calls ExpandOne(), which brings us back here.  In this case, always
8732      * call the machine specific expansion function, if possible.  Otherwise,
8733      * return FAIL.
8734      */
8735     if (recursive)
8736 #ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8737 	return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8738 #else
8739 	return FAIL;
8740 #endif
8741 
8742 #ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8743     /*
8744      * If there are any special wildcard characters which we cannot handle
8745      * here, call machine specific function for all the expansion.  This
8746      * avoids starting the shell for each argument separately.
8747      * For `=expr` do use the internal function.
8748      */
8749     for (i = 0; i < num_pat; i++)
8750     {
8751 	if (vim_strpbrk(pat[i], (char_u *)SPECIAL_WILDCHAR) != NULL
8752 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8753 		&& !(vim_backtick(pat[i]) && pat[i][1] == '=')
8754 # endif
8755 	   )
8756 	    return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8757     }
8758 #endif
8759 
8760     recursive = TRUE;
8761 
8762     /*
8763      * The matching file names are stored in a growarray.  Init it empty.
8764      */
8765     ga_init2(&ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 30);
8766 
8767     for (i = 0; i < num_pat; ++i)
8768     {
8769 	add_pat = -1;
8770 	p = pat[i];
8771 
8772 #ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8773 	if (vim_backtick(p))
8774 	    add_pat = expand_backtick(&ga, p, flags);
8775 	else
8776 #endif
8777 	{
8778 	    /*
8779 	     * First expand environment variables, "~/" and "~user/".
8780 	     */
8781 	    if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8782 	    {
8783 		p = expand_env_save(p);
8784 		if (p == NULL)
8785 		    p = pat[i];
8786 #ifdef UNIX
8787 		/*
8788 		 * On Unix, if expand_env() can't expand an environment
8789 		 * variable, use the shell to do that.  Discard previously
8790 		 * found file names and start all over again.
8791 		 */
8792 		else if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8793 		{
8794 		    vim_free(p);
8795 		    ga_clear(&ga);
8796 		    i = mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file,
8797 								       flags);
8798 		    recursive = FALSE;
8799 		    return i;
8800 		}
8801 #endif
8802 	    }
8803 
8804 	    /*
8805 	     * If there are wildcards: Expand file names and add each match to
8806 	     * the list.  If there is no match, and EW_NOTFOUND is given, add
8807 	     * the pattern.
8808 	     * If there are no wildcards: Add the file name if it exists or
8809 	     * when EW_NOTFOUND is given.
8810 	     */
8811 	    if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(p))
8812 		add_pat = mch_expandpath(&ga, p, flags);
8813 	}
8814 
8815 	if (add_pat == -1 || (add_pat == 0 && (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)))
8816 	{
8817 	    char_u	*t = backslash_halve_save(p);
8818 
8819 #if defined(MACOS_CLASSIC)
8820 	    slash_to_colon(t);
8821 #endif
8822 	    /* When EW_NOTFOUND is used, always add files and dirs.  Makes
8823 	     * "vim c:/" work. */
8824 	    if (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)
8825 		addfile(&ga, t, flags | EW_DIR | EW_FILE);
8826 	    else if (mch_getperm(t) >= 0)
8827 		addfile(&ga, t, flags);
8828 	    vim_free(t);
8829 	}
8830 
8831 	if (p != pat[i])
8832 	    vim_free(p);
8833     }
8834 
8835     *num_file = ga.ga_len;
8836     *file = (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? (char_u **)ga.ga_data : (char_u **)"";
8837 
8838     recursive = FALSE;
8839 
8840     return (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? OK : FAIL;
8841 }
8842 
8843 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8844 
8845 /*
8846  * Return TRUE if we can expand this backtick thing here.
8847  */
8848     static int
8849 vim_backtick(p)
8850     char_u	*p;
8851 {
8852     return (*p == '`' && *(p + 1) != NUL && *(p + STRLEN(p) - 1) == '`');
8853 }
8854 
8855 /*
8856  * Expand an item in `backticks` by executing it as a command.
8857  * Currently only works when pat[] starts and ends with a `.
8858  * Returns number of file names found.
8859  */
8860     static int
8861 expand_backtick(gap, pat, flags)
8862     garray_T	*gap;
8863     char_u	*pat;
8864     int		flags;	/* EW_* flags */
8865 {
8866     char_u	*p;
8867     char_u	*cmd;
8868     char_u	*buffer;
8869     int		cnt = 0;
8870     int		i;
8871 
8872     /* Create the command: lop off the backticks. */
8873     cmd = vim_strnsave(pat + 1, (int)STRLEN(pat) - 2);
8874     if (cmd == NULL)
8875 	return 0;
8876 
8877 #ifdef FEAT_EVAL
8878     if (*cmd == '=')	    /* `={expr}`: Expand expression */
8879 	buffer = eval_to_string(cmd + 1, &p);
8880     else
8881 #endif
8882 	buffer = get_cmd_output(cmd, NULL,
8883 				      (flags & EW_SILENT) ? SHELL_SILENT : 0);
8884     vim_free(cmd);
8885     if (buffer == NULL)
8886 	return 0;
8887 
8888     cmd = buffer;
8889     while (*cmd != NUL)
8890     {
8891 	cmd = skipwhite(cmd);		/* skip over white space */
8892 	p = cmd;
8893 	while (*p != NUL && *p != '\r' && *p != '\n') /* skip over entry */
8894 	    ++p;
8895 	/* add an entry if it is not empty */
8896 	if (p > cmd)
8897 	{
8898 	    i = *p;
8899 	    *p = NUL;
8900 	    addfile(gap, cmd, flags);
8901 	    *p = i;
8902 	    ++cnt;
8903 	}
8904 	cmd = p;
8905 	while (*cmd != NUL && (*cmd == '\r' || *cmd == '\n'))
8906 	    ++cmd;
8907     }
8908 
8909     vim_free(buffer);
8910     return cnt;
8911 }
8912 # endif /* VIM_BACKTICK */
8913 
8914 /*
8915  * Add a file to a file list.  Accepted flags:
8916  * EW_DIR	add directories
8917  * EW_FILE	add files
8918  * EW_NOTFOUND	add even when it doesn't exist
8919  * EW_ADDSLASH	add slash after directory name
8920  */
8921     void
8922 addfile(gap, f, flags)
8923     garray_T	*gap;
8924     char_u	*f;	/* filename */
8925     int		flags;
8926 {
8927     char_u	*p;
8928     int		isdir;
8929 
8930     /* if the file/dir doesn't exist, may not add it */
8931     if (!(flags & EW_NOTFOUND) && mch_getperm(f) < 0)
8932 	return;
8933 
8934 #ifdef FNAME_ILLEGAL
8935     /* if the file/dir contains illegal characters, don't add it */
8936     if (vim_strpbrk(f, (char_u *)FNAME_ILLEGAL) != NULL)
8937 	return;
8938 #endif
8939 
8940     isdir = mch_isdir(f);
8941     if ((isdir && !(flags & EW_DIR)) || (!isdir && !(flags & EW_FILE)))
8942 	return;
8943 
8944     /* Make room for another item in the file list. */
8945     if (ga_grow(gap, 1) == FAIL)
8946 	return;
8947 
8948     p = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(f) + 1 + isdir));
8949     if (p == NULL)
8950 	return;
8951 
8952     STRCPY(p, f);
8953 #ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
8954     slash_adjust(p);
8955 #endif
8956     /*
8957      * Append a slash or backslash after directory names if none is present.
8958      */
8959 #ifndef DONT_ADD_PATHSEP_TO_DIR
8960     if (isdir && (flags & EW_ADDSLASH))
8961 	add_pathsep(p);
8962 #endif
8963     ((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[gap->ga_len++] = p;
8964 }
8965 #endif /* !NO_EXPANDPATH */
8966 
8967 #if defined(VIM_BACKTICK) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
8968 
8969 #ifndef SEEK_SET
8970 # define SEEK_SET 0
8971 #endif
8972 #ifndef SEEK_END
8973 # define SEEK_END 2
8974 #endif
8975 
8976 /*
8977  * Get the stdout of an external command.
8978  * Returns an allocated string, or NULL for error.
8979  */
8980     char_u *
8981 get_cmd_output(cmd, infile, flags)
8982     char_u	*cmd;
8983     char_u	*infile;	/* optional input file name */
8984     int		flags;		/* can be SHELL_SILENT */
8985 {
8986     char_u	*tempname;
8987     char_u	*command;
8988     char_u	*buffer = NULL;
8989     int		len;
8990     int		i = 0;
8991     FILE	*fd;
8992 
8993     if (check_restricted() || check_secure())
8994 	return NULL;
8995 
8996     /* get a name for the temp file */
8997     if ((tempname = vim_tempname('o')) == NULL)
8998     {
8999 	EMSG(_(e_notmp));
9000 	return NULL;
9001     }
9002 
9003     /* Add the redirection stuff */
9004     command = make_filter_cmd(cmd, infile, tempname);
9005     if (command == NULL)
9006 	goto done;
9007 
9008     /*
9009      * Call the shell to execute the command (errors are ignored).
9010      * Don't check timestamps here.
9011      */
9012     ++no_check_timestamps;
9013     call_shell(command, SHELL_DOOUT | SHELL_EXPAND | flags);
9014     --no_check_timestamps;
9015 
9016     vim_free(command);
9017 
9018     /*
9019      * read the names from the file into memory
9020      */
9021 # ifdef VMS
9022     /* created temporary file is not allways readable as binary */
9023     fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, "r");
9024 # else
9025     fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, READBIN);
9026 # endif
9027 
9028     if (fd == NULL)
9029     {
9030 	EMSG2(_(e_notopen), tempname);
9031 	goto done;
9032     }
9033 
9034     fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_END);
9035     len = ftell(fd);		    /* get size of temp file */
9036     fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_SET);
9037 
9038     buffer = alloc(len + 1);
9039     if (buffer != NULL)
9040 	i = (int)fread((char *)buffer, (size_t)1, (size_t)len, fd);
9041     fclose(fd);
9042     mch_remove(tempname);
9043     if (buffer == NULL)
9044 	goto done;
9045 #ifdef VMS
9046     len = i;	/* VMS doesn't give us what we asked for... */
9047 #endif
9048     if (i != len)
9049     {
9050 	EMSG2(_(e_notread), tempname);
9051 	vim_free(buffer);
9052 	buffer = NULL;
9053     }
9054     else
9055 	buffer[len] = '\0';	/* make sure the buffer is terminated */
9056 
9057 done:
9058     vim_free(tempname);
9059     return buffer;
9060 }
9061 #endif
9062 
9063 /*
9064  * Free the list of files returned by expand_wildcards() or other expansion
9065  * functions.
9066  */
9067     void
9068 FreeWild(count, files)
9069     int	    count;
9070     char_u  **files;
9071 {
9072     if (files == NULL || count <= 0)
9073 	return;
9074 #if defined(__EMX__) && defined(__ALWAYS_HAS_TRAILING_NULL_POINTER) /* XXX */
9075     /*
9076      * Is this still OK for when other functions than expand_wildcards() have
9077      * been used???
9078      */
9079     _fnexplodefree((char **)files);
9080 #else
9081     while (count--)
9082 	vim_free(files[count]);
9083     vim_free(files);
9084 #endif
9085 }
9086 
9087 /*
9088  * return TRUE when need to go to Insert mode because of 'insertmode'.
9089  * Don't do this when still processing a command or a mapping.
9090  * Don't do this when inside a ":normal" command.
9091  */
9092     int
9093 goto_im()
9094 {
9095     return (p_im && stuff_empty() && typebuf_typed());
9096 }
9097